B-63943en 03 110525

FANUC Series 30+-MODEL A FANUC Series 31+-MODEL A FANUC Series 32+-MODEL A
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
B-63943EN/03
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japans Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law. The export of Series 30i-A, Series 31i-A5 from Japan is subject to an export license by the government of Japan. Other models in this manual may also be subject to export controls. Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice. The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to a failure of the product, install a safety device. In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible. This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by or in the main body.
B-63943EN/03
CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES
CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES

The model names of the following CNCs described in this manual have been changed from those shown in lower lines to those shown in upper lines in fields of the following table. The model names were changed, but their specifications remain unchanged. Keep the following in mind when using these models. Replace the old model names in this manual with the corresponding new model names. Replace the old model names indicated by the machines with the corresponding new model names.
Table 1 CNC Model Names Model name FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A (Old model name : FANUC Series 300i-MODEL A) FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A (Old model name : FANUC Series 300is-MODEL A) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A (Old model name : FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5 (Old model name : FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A5) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A (Old model name : FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5 (Old model name : FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A5) FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A (Old model name : FANUC Series 320i-MODEL A) FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A (Old model name : FANUC Series 320is-MODEL A) 30i A (300iA) 30i A (300isA) 31i A (310iA) 31i A5 (310iA5) 31i A (310isA) 31i A5 (310isA5) 32i A (320iA) 32i A (320isA) Abbreviation Series 30i (Series 300i) Series 30i (Series 300is) Series 31i (Series 310i)
Series 31i (Series 310is)
Series 32i (Series 320i) Series 32i (Series 320is)
a-1
B-63943EN/03
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Described below are the safety precautions regarding the control units and those peripheral units explained herein. The safety precautions must be observed in order to use these units safely. Because exchanging, as well as performing daily maintenance operations on, the control units and those peripheral units explained herein may incur diverse dangers, you cannot be involved in such work unless you have been sufficiently trained for safety. Some safety precautions may not apply to your control units or peripheral units explained herein because the units have no corresponding function. If this is the case, skip reading those precautions. As for safety precautions regarding machine tools, refer to the respective machine manuals provided by the machine tool builders. Before starting to operate machines for check purposes, be sure to read the manuals provided by the machine tool builders and FANUC and sufficiently understand their descriptions. Contents DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING..........s-2 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING.................................................................s-4 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE............................s-5
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed. CAUTION Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed. NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-63943EN/03
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING

WARNING 1 Before starting mounting, wiring, and exchanging, be sure to shut off externally supplied power. Otherwise, electrical shocks, breakdown, and blowout may occur. If a control unit is turned off but other units are not, it is likely that power may be supplied to servo units, resulting in the units being damaged and workers getting an electrical shock when the units are exchanged. 2 Voltage lingers in servo and spindle amplifiers for a while even after power has been turned off, resulting in workers possibly getting an electrical shock when the workers touch them. Before starting to exchange these amplifiers, wait for 20 minutes after power has been turned off. 3 Be sure to ground your control units and peripheral units in accordance with your national grounding standards (protective grounding class C or stricter). Otherwise, electrical shocks, breakdown, and blowout may occur. 4 In order to prevent damage that may be caused by static electricity, wear a grounding wrist strap or take a similar protective measure before starting to touch a printed-circuit board or unit or attach a cable. Static electricity from human bodies can damage electrical circuits. 5 In unit replacement, specify the same settings and parameters in the newly installed unit as those for the one removed. (For details, refer to the respective manuals for the units.) Operating the newly installed unit with incorrect settings or parameters will cause the machine to behave unexpectedly, possibly leading to a damaged workpiece or machine or injury. 6 If you notice an apparent hardware fault, such as abnormal noise, abnormal odor, smoke, ignition, or abnormal heat, in the hardware while power is being supplied to it, shut it off at once. These faults can cause fire, breakdown, blowout, and malfunction. 7 The radiating fins of control units, servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and other devices can remain very hot for a while after power has been turned off, making you get burned if you touch them. Before starting to work on them, wait and make sure they are cool. 8 When exchanging heavy stuff, you should do so together with two or more people. If you try to exchange heavy stuff all by yourself, you may drop it and get hurt. 9 Wiring work in the control units and peripheral units must be done only after they have been installed. Otherwise, electrical shocks can occur. 10 Be careful not to damage cables. Otherwise, electrical shocks can occur. 11 When working, wear suitable clothes with safety taken into account. Otherwise, injury and electrical shocks can occur. 12 Do not work with your hands wet. Otherwise, electrical shocks and damage to electrical circuits can occur.
s-2
B-63943EN/03
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15
CAUTION Failing to observe any caution stated below can lead to fire, breakdown, blowout, and malfunction. Do not attach the units directly to any flammable object or install the units near any flammable object. Do not allow any foreign matter (such as a screw, metal chip, or coolant) to get in the units. Handle the units and printed-circuit boards gently because they are precision devices. Be careful not to drop them or give a high impact to them. Lay signal wires away from power wires as stated in this manual. When fastening each unit or wire, be sure to observe the screw tightening torque specified for them. If screws are tightened too weakly or too strongly, it is likely that the unit may drop, break, or malfunction, or the wire may be short-circuited. Do not forget to tighten all necessary screw. Do not block any cooling fan air inlet or outlet. For units having no cooling fan, allow space for natural convection cooling above and below them. Be careful not to make an incorrect wiring or connection. Be sure to attach wires and cables to their respective corresponding terminals and connectors. Confirm equipments electrical rating stated herein. Do not apply any unspecified voltage to the equipment. Do not confuse voltage polarity. Carefully confirm the arrangement of connector pins. When making a cable assembly, press-mount, crimp, or solder the wires, using the tool specified by the cable manufacturer. Use printed-circuit boards and peripheral units that match your control unit. When mounting the units, pay attention to their mass. When detaching a cable from a unit, hold the connector rather than the cable. When attaching a cable, be sure to fit its connector to the connector pins securely. For connectors having a lock mechanism, be sure to lock them securely. As for the shielding wires of the cables specified herein, securely ground them, using, for example, cable clamps. Always use wires whose length, diameter, heat resistance, and flex resistance match their use.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B-63943EN/03
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING

WARNING 1 When designing, be sure to observe all rules stated in this document and any related manuals. Otherwise, it is likely that failure and malfunction may occur. 2 Failures in the control units and I/O units as well as input power abnormality and communication failures can hamper the normal operation of these I/O units. Design each I/O unit in such a way that the machine can operate safely, for example, by providing an external safety circuit to the I/O unit so that no accident will occur even if the I/O unit fails to operate normally. The DO function of each I/O unit has been designed in such a way that, if a system alarm is issued in the control unit that controls the I/O unit or the power of the control unit or the I/O unit is turned off, the DO function of all the I/O units is turned off. However, it is not guaranteed that the DO function is surely turned off. So, it is requested that, if a signal regarding safety is involved, a safety circuit external to each I/O unit must be configured. Using the dual check safety function makes it possible to detect a single fault in a portion related to safety. For details of the dual check safety function, refer to the FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A Dual Check Safety Connection Manual (B-64003EN). 3 Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level, oil-free coolants called synthetic, and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level, in particular, can largely affect the CNC and peripheral units. Please note that, even if consideration is taken to protect them from direct exposure to these coolants, the following trouble is likely to occur. Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or peripheral units, it corrodes metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly leading to a defective component. Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example, PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow into the CNC or peripheral units through, for example, gaskets. It is likely that, if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the insulation and damage the components. Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration. CAUTION Install each control unit, display unit, MDI unit, and machine operator panel in such a place that neither cutting chip nor coolant will spatter to them. Otherwise, damage or malfunction may occur.
s-4
B-63943EN/03
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING Battery replacement Do not replace batteries unless you have been well informed of maintenance work and safety. When opening the cabinet and replacing batteries, be careful not to touch any high-voltage circuit (marked with and covered with an electric shock prevention cover). When the electric shock prevention cover has been removed, you will get an electric shock if you touch any high-voltage circuit. WARNING Fuse replacement Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the cause of the blown fuse. So, do not replace fuses unless you have been well informed of maintenance work and safety. When opening the cabinet and replacing fuses, be careful not to touch any high-voltage circuit (marked with and covered with an electric shock prevention cover). When the electric shock prevention cover has been removed, you will get an electric shock if you touch any high-voltage circuit. CAUTION Handle the batteries gently. Do not drop them or give a strong impact to them. NOTE Each control unit uses batteries, because it must hold data, such as programs, offset values, and parameters even when AC power for it is off. Back up the data (programs, offset values, and parameters) regularly. If the battery voltage becomes low, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators panel or screen. Once the battery voltage alarm has been displayed, replace the batteries within one week. Otherwise, the memory contents may be lost. For the battery replacement procedure, see Section 4.4, Batteries. Recollect or discard old batteries in the way your local autonomous community specifies.
s-5
B-63943EN/03
PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required for connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The manual outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC control units, as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and supplies additional information on using these components. The manual outlines the I/O unit, servo, spindle, and other components common to FANUC CNC control units, and supplies additional information on using these components in this CNC control unit. For detailed specifications, refer to the manuals of these components. For options not covered in this manual, also refer to the manuals of these components.
Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A FANUC Series 300i-MODEL A FANUC Series 300is-MODEL A FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5 FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A5 FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A5 FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A FANUC Series 320i-MODEL A FANUC Series 320is-MODEL A 30i 300i 300is 31i 310i 310is 32i 320i 320is Abbreviation Series 30i Series 300i Series 300is Series 31i Series 310i Series 310is Series 32i Series 320i Series 320is
Organization of this manuals

This manual consists of chapters 1 to 13 and appendixes at the end of the book.
Chapter and title Chapter 1 CONFIGURATION Chapter 2 TOTAL CONNECTION DAIGRAMS Chapter 3 INSTALLATION Contents Provides general information related to the connection of the 30i series, as well as an introduction to detailed information. Describes how to connect peripheral units to the 30i series.
Chapter 4 POWER SUPPLAY CONNECTION Chapter 5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIOHERALS
Describes the installation requirements for using the 30i series. 1) Required power supply capacity 2) Heat output 3) Locations of connectors on the control unit 4) Action against noise Describes how to make connections related to the power supply of the 30i series. Describes how to connect the following peripheral devices to the 30i series: 1) Display unit / MDI unit 2) I/O device (RS-232-C) 3) High-speed skip (HDI) 4) Embedded Ethernet Describes how to connect spindle-related units to the 30i series. Describes how to connect servo-related units to the 30i series.
Chapter 6 SPINDLE CONNECTION Chapter 7 SERVO INTERFACE
p-1
PREFACE
Chapter and title Chapter 8 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link Chapter 9 STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP Chapter 10 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS Chapter 11 CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is Chapter 12 HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) Chapter 13 PANEL i APPENDIX Contents
B-63943EN/03
Describes how to connect machine interface I/O with the FANUC I/O Link.
Describes how to handle the emergency stop signal. Be sure to read this chapter. Describes how to connect the 30i series to networks.
Describes connection for Series 300is/310is/320is.
Describes the highspeed serial bus (HSSB) that can be used with the 30i series. Describes how to connect a PANEL i to the 30i series. A) B) C) D) E) F) OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) OPTICAL FIBER CABLE LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A5 Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i /300is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A5, Series 32i/320i /320is-A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals Manual name DESCRIPTIONS CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) OPERATORS MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe System) OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center System) MAINTENANCE MANUAL PARAMETER MANUAL Programming Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL PMC PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL Network PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATORS MANUAL DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL Specification number B-63942EN B-63943EN B-63943EN-1 B-63944EN B-63944EN-1 B-63944EN-2 B-63945EN B-63950EN B-63943EN-2 B-66263EN B-63943EN-3 B-63983EN B-63993EN B-64014EN B-64043EN B-64163EN B-64463EN *
p-2
B-63943EN/03
PREFACE
Manual name Specification number B-63874EN B-63874EN-2 B-63874EN-1 B-64003EN
Operation guidance function MANUAL GUIDE i (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) OPERATORS MANUAL MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System) OPERATORS MANUAL MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions) OPERATORS MANUAL Dual Check Safety Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR is/i/is/i series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR is/i/is/i series
Table 2 Related manuals Manual name FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR is series FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR is series DESCRIPTIONS FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series DESCRIPTIONS FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series DESCRIPTIONS FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series DESCRIPTIONS FANUC SERVO MOTOR is series FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC SERVO MOTOR is series FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER i series MAINTENANCE MANUAL FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR is series FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR is series PARAMETER MANUAL FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR i series PARAMETER MANUAL Specification number B-65262EN B-65272EN B-65302EN B-65312EN B-65282EN B-65322EN
B-65285EN
B-65325EN
B-65270EN
B-65280EN
Any of the servo motors and spindles listed above can be connected to the CNC described in this manual. However, i series servo amplifiers can only be connected to i series SVMs (for 30i/31i/32i). This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually connected.
p-3
B-63943EN/03
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES ............................................................a-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING............................................................................................ s-2 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING ..................................... s-4 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE .... s-5
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1 1 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1

1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES .............. 1
1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units .............................................1 Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units..................................................4 Configurations of Optional Boards ..........................................................................8 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview .........................................................10 Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview..............................................................11
1.2
HARDWARE OVERVIEW............................................................................ 10
1.2.1 1.2.2
2 3
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..................................................... 12 INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 16

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET............... 16
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2.1 Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet......................................................16 Installation Conditions of the Control Unit ............................................................17 Power Supply Capacities of CNC-related Units.....................................................17
POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY ..................................................................... 17 CAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL POWER MAGNETICS CABINETS ................................................... 18 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET ...... 19
3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic Cabinet..............................20 Heat Output of Each Unit .......................................................................................20 Thermal Design of Operator's Panel.......................................................................21 Grounding as Noise Suppression Measures ...........................................................23
3.5.1.1 3.5.1.2 Grounding methods ........................................................................................... 23 Cabinet............................................................................................................... 24
3.5
COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE AND GROUNDING .................. 22

3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7
Protective Ground (Grounding for Protection against Indirect Contact) ...............27 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit ...........................................28 Separating Signal Lines..........................................................................................31 Noise Suppressor....................................................................................................32 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing.......................................................................33 Lightning Surge Absorber Installation ...................................................................36 Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit ....................................................37 Installing the Stand-alone Type Control Unit ........................................................38
3.6 3.7
CONTROL UNIT.......................................................................................... 37
3.6.1 3.6.2
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS AND GROUND TERMINALS ................................................................................................ 39

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.8
B-63943EN/03
DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES ...... 39 GENERAL ................................................................................................... 42 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT............. 42
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Power Supply for the Control Unit.........................................................................42 External 24 VDC Power Specification and Circuit Configuration.........................42 Power-on Sequence ................................................................................................46 Power-off Sequence ...............................................................................................46
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION......................................................... 42

4.1 4.2
4.3 4.4
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT ................................. 47 BATTERIES................................................................................................. 48

4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 Battery for Memory Backup in the CNC Control Unit (3 VDC) ...........................48
4.4.1.1 Replacing the lithium battery............................................................................. 49
Batteries for PANEL i (3VDC) ..............................................................................53 Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC) ............................................54 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC)............................56
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ............................................. 57

5.1 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT (LCD-MOUNTED TYPE 30i SERIES) ................................................................................................ 57
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 Overview ................................................................................................................57 Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD-mounted Type 30i Series)..............................57 Connection with the Standard MDI Unit................................................................58 Key Layout of MDI................................................................................................59
5.2
CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT (STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES) ................................................................................................ 61
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 Overview ................................................................................................................61 Connection with an LCD Unit................................................................................62 With Two Display Units.........................................................................................64
5.2.3.1 5.2.3.2 Each connection................................................................................................. 64 Installing the display unit................................................................................... 68
5.3
CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES ...................................... 68

5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 Overview ................................................................................................................68 Connecting I/O Devices .........................................................................................69 RS-232-C Serial Port..............................................................................................70 RS-232-C Interface Specification...........................................................................72 Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI) .................................................................79 Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI) ................................................80 Connection to the Ethernet Interface......................................................................81 Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable.......................................................................83 Anti-Noise Measure ...............................................................................................85 Network Installation ...............................................................................................85
5.4 5.5
CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)........................................... 79

5.4.1 5.4.2 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4
Linking The EMBEDDED Ethernet Interface ............................................... 81
SPINDLE CONNECTION ...................................................................... 87

6.1 SERIAL SPINDLE........................................................................................ 88
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles ............................................................88 Connecting Three to Four Serial Spindles..............................................................90 Connecting Five or Six Serial Spindles..................................................................96 Connecting Seven or Eight Serial spindles ............................................................97
SERVO INTERFACE............................................................................. 98
c-2
B-63943EN/03
TABLE OF CONTENTS CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS........................................... 98

7.1.1 7.1.2 Overview ................................................................................................................99 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers ...........................................................................99 Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ....................................................103 Connection of Power Supply................................................................................103 Separate Detector Interface (Serial Interface) ......................................................105 Separate Detector Interface (Parallel interface)....................................................106 Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface) ....................................................107 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector.........................................109 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit....................................110 Connector Locations.............................................................................................111 Installation ............................................................................................................112 Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit ........................................113 Overview ..............................................................................................................117 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ..............................119 Connection of Power Supply................................................................................120 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface (Analog 1Vp-p Interface) ..................122 Input Signal Specifications...................................................................................123 Method for Checking the Encoder Signals...........................................................124 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector.........................................125 Connection Between the Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit and Additional Unit.....................................................................................................126 Connector Locations.............................................................................................126 Installation ............................................................................................................127 Notes on Installing an Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit ................128
7.1 7.2
SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE...................................................... 101

7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.2.10
7.3
ANALOG INPUT SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE .......................... 116

7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.3.7 7.3.8 7.3.9 7.3.10 7.3.11
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link ................................................... 130

8.1 8.2 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 130 CONNECTION........................................................................................... 130
8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable .............................................132 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable ....................................133 Connection when Multiple Channels of FANUC I/O Links are Used .................136
8.3 8.4
UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O Link................. 146 CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE.......................... 147
8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.4.7 8.4.8 8.4.9 8.4.10 8.4.11 8.4.12 8.4.13 8.4.14 8.4.15 8.4.16 8.4.17 8.4.18 Configuration .......................................................................................................147 Connection Diagram.............................................................................................148 Module Specifications..........................................................................................148 DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment.......................................................................150 DI (Input Signal) Connection ...............................................................................151 DO (Output Signal) Connection...........................................................................153 DI/DO Signal Specifications ................................................................................154 2A Output Connector Pin Allocation ...................................................................155 2A DO (Output Signal) Connection .....................................................................156 2A Output DO Signal Specifications ...................................................................157 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation ...............................................................158 Analog Input Signal Connections.........................................................................159 Analog Input Signal Specifications ......................................................................160 Analog Input Specifications .................................................................................160 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....................................................................162 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator ...........................................................163 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules.......................................................164 Module Installation...............................................................................................165
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.4.19 8.4.20
B-63943EN/03
Other Notes...........................................................................................................169 Distribution I/O Setting ........................................................................................172
8.5
CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT)....................................................................................................... 175

8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 8.5.5 8.5.6 8.5.7 8.5.8 8.5.9 8.5.10 Overall Connection Diagram................................................................................175 Power Connection ................................................................................................176 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement .....................................................................177 DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection ...................................................178 DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection ...................................................................179 DO (Output Signal) Connection...........................................................................181 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....................................................................184 External View.......................................................................................................185 Specifications .......................................................................................................186 Other Notes...........................................................................................................187
8.6
CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE AND POWER MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE....................................................... 191
8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5 8.6.6 8.6.7 8.6.8 8.6.9 Overall Connection Diagram................................................................................191 Power Connection ................................................................................................192 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement .....................................................................193 DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection ...................................................194 DO (Output Signal) Connection...........................................................................198 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....................................................................199 External View.......................................................................................................200 Specifications .......................................................................................................201 Other Notes...........................................................................................................202 Overview ..............................................................................................................205 Specification.........................................................................................................206 Connection ...........................................................................................................209
8.7.3.1 I/O Link interface ............................................................................................ 209
8.7
FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT ..................................................... 205

8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3
8.8
CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT SERIES WITH I/O LINK .... 211
8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4 Overview ..............................................................................................................211 Connection ...........................................................................................................212 Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected .............................................212 Address Assignment by Ladder............................................................................212 Overview ..............................................................................................................213 Total Connection Diagram ...................................................................................214 Each Connections .................................................................................................215
8.9.3.1 8.9.3.2 8.9.3.3 8.9.3.4 8.9.3.5 8.9.3.6 8.9.3.7 8.9.3.8 8.9.3.9 Pin assignment ................................................................................................. 215 Power supply connection................................................................................. 216 I/O link connection .......................................................................................... 217 Emergency stop signal connection .................................................................. 218 Power ON/OFF control signal connection....................................................... 218 General-purpose DI signal connection ............................................................ 219 General-purpose DO signal connection........................................................... 221 Manual pulse generator connection ................................................................. 222 Connector (on the cable side) specifications ................................................... 224 Keyboard of main panel................................................................................... 225 Override signals ............................................................................................... 226
8.9
CONNECTION TO ATANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL.......... 213

8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3
8.9.4 8.9.5 8.9.6
I/O Address...........................................................................................................225
8.9.4.1 8.9.4.2
I/O Mapping .........................................................................................................226 Outline ..................................................................................................................227

8.9.6.1 Outline of main panel ...................................................................................... 227 c-4
B-63943EN/03
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.9.6.2 8.9.6.3 8.9.6.4 Outline of sub panel A..................................................................................... 228 Outline of sub panel D..................................................................................... 229 Connector locations of main panel .................................................................. 230 Environmental requirement ............................................................................. 231 Order specification........................................................................................... 231 Main panel specification.................................................................................. 231 Sub panel A/D specification ............................................................................ 231 Power supply specification .............................................................................. 231 General-purpose DI signal definition .............................................................. 232 General-purpose DO signal definition............................................................. 232 Meaning of key symbols.................................................................................. 232 Detachable key top .......................................................................................... 233
8.9.7
Specifications .......................................................................................................231
8.9.7.1 8.9.7.2 8.9.7.3 8.9.7.4 8.9.7.5 8.9.7.6 8.9.7.7
8.9.8 8.9.9 8.9.10 8.9.11
Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel ..........................................232

8.9.8.1 8.9.8.2
Others ...................................................................................................................234 Maintenance Parts ................................................................................................237 Other Notes...........................................................................................................237
STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP ....................................................... 238

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 STOP MODES........................................................................................... 238 SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER ................................................... 238 STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR ......................................................... 239 STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR ............................................................ 239 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL................................................................... 240 CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTI-PATH CONTROL .......................................... 245
10 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS ........................................... 246 11 CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is.................................. 247
11.1 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS .......................................................... 247
11.1.1 11.1.2 LCD-Mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is Control Unit................................247 Display Unit for is Series CNC (Stand-Alone Type) ...........................................248 Connector Names and Connector Layout.............................................................249
11.2.1.1 LCD-mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is ................................................. 249 11.2.1.2 Display Unit for is Series................................................................................. 250
11.2
INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 249

11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3
Environmental Conditions for Control Units .......................................................250 Power Supply Capacity ........................................................................................251 Main Power Input.................................................................................................252 Backup Unit..........................................................................................................253 Ethernet Interface (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX)...................................................257 Serial Port and USB Port......................................................................................264
11.3.4.1 11.3.4.2 11.3.4.3 11.3.4.4 Serial port 1 ..................................................................................................... 264 Serial port 2 ..................................................................................................... 266 USB port (rear side)......................................................................................... 268 USB port (front side) ....................................................................................... 270
11.3
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS .................................................. 252

11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4
11.3.5 11.3.6
High-speed Serial Bus (HSSB) [For Stand-alone Type] ......................................271 Buzzer Output.......................................................................................................271
12 CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS ................................................................. 273
12.1 12.2 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 273 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 273
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.3

12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 12.3.5 12.3.6 12.3.7
B-63943EN/03
CONNECTION USING THE HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)............ 273

Overview ..............................................................................................................273 Connection Diagram.............................................................................................274 Specifications of a Commercial PC......................................................................274 Installation Environment ......................................................................................275 Handling Precautions ...........................................................................................275 Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface Boards .............................275 Cable Connection .................................................................................................276 Overview ..............................................................................................................277 Connection Diagram.............................................................................................277
12.4
CONNECTION USING Ethernet................................................................ 277

12.4.1 12.4.2
13 PANEL i .............................................................................................. 278 APPENDIX A B OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS ...................................................... 281 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES ......................... 347
B.1 BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS ........................................................ 347
B.1.1 B.1.2 Vertical-type Connectors......................................................................................347 Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw-fixing Connector Housings) .............................................................................................................347 Strand Wire Press-mount Connector ....................................................................348 Soldering Type Connector....................................................................................348
B.2 B.3
CABLE CONNECTORS ............................................................................ 347

B.2.1 B.2.2
RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES .................................................................................................... 349

B.3.1 B.3.2 Recommended Connectors...................................................................................350 Applicable Cables.................................................................................................350
C D E F
CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)................................. 358 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE .................................................................... 361 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) ................................................... 370 MEMORY CARD INTERFACE............................................................ 372
c-6
B-63943EN/03
1.CONFIGURATION
1
1.1
CONFIGURATION
CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES
The 30i series control units are divided into two types: the LCD-mounted type and stand-alone type. LCD-mounted type control units have a built-in display. Stand-alone type control units have a separate display unit. In the following sections, the LCD-mounted type is also referred to as the LCD-mounted type, and the stand-alone type is also referred to as the stand-alone type. The configuration and component names of each type are shown in the figures given below. This manual explains how to attach the connectors shown in these figures to devices. The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1.1.1
Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units
LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i control units (A circle indicates that the corresponding unit is available.)
Display unit 7.2"STN monochrome LCD 8.4"TFT color LCD 10.4"TFT color LCD 10.4"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) 15"TFT color LCD 15"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) Expansion slot None 2 None 2 None 2 None 2 None 2 None 2 Horizontal soft key 5+2 5+2 5+2 5+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 Vertical soft key None None None None 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 30i 31i 32i
LCD-mounted type Series 300is/310is/320is control units (A circle indicates that the corresponding unit is available.)
Display unit 10.4"TFT color LCD 10.4"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) 12.1"TFT color LCD 12.1"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) 15"TFT color LCD 15"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) Expansion slot None 2 None 2 None 2 None 2 None 2 None 2 Horizontal soft key 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 Vertical soft key 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 300is 310is 320is
-1-
1.CONFIGURATION
LCD-mounted type control unit
B-63943EN/03
Vertical soft keys
Liquid-crystal display
Memory card interface
USB port
Horizontal soft keys
NOTE 1 This figure is a front view of the LCD-mounted type control unit with an 10.4 TFT color liquid-crystal display. The configurations of other control units are basically the same as that shown above. 2 The Series 30i/31i/32i do not support the USB port. 3 The 7.2 and 8.4 display units do not have vertical soft keys.
-2-
B-63943EN/03
1.CONFIGURATION
Fan unit Battery
Unit rear panel Servo unit connector [COP10A-1] [COP10A-2] (7)
Power supply unit
Ethernet connector [CD38A] (5.5) Power supply connector [CPD16A]
MDI connector [CA55] (5.1)
Fuse
Soft key
Serial spindle connector [JA41] (6.1)
I/O device interface (RS-232-C) or serial spindle connector [JD56A] (5.3, 6.1)
I/O-Link connector [JD51A] (8.2)
I/O device interface connector (RS-232-C) [JD36A/JD54] (5.3)
High-speed skip connector [JA40] (5.4)
NOTE This figure is a rear view of the 30i/31i/32i LCD-mounted type control unit without option slots. For the LCD-mounted type 300is/310is/320is control units, see Chapter 11. The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
-3-
1.CONFIGURATION
B-63943EN/03
1.1.2
Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units
Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i control units (A circle indicates that the corresponding unit is available.)
Slot rack name 2-slot rack 4-slot rack Expansion slot 2 4 30i 31i 32i
Series 30i/31i/32i display units (A circle indicates that the corresponding unit is available.)
Display unit 10.4"TFT color LCD 10.4"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) 15" TFT color LCD 15" TFT color LCD (with touch panel) Horizontal soft key 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 Vertical soft key 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 30i 31i 32i
Series 300i/310i/320i PANEL i (A circle indicates that the corresponding model is available.)
Display unit 10.4"TFT color LCD 10.4"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) 15" TFT color LCD 15" TFT color LCD (with touch panel) Horizontal soft key 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 Vertical soft key 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 30i 31i 32i
Series 300is/310is/320is CNC display units (A circle indicates that the corresponding unit is available.)
Display unit 10.4"TFT color LCD 10.4"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) 12.1"TFT color LCD 12.1"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) 15"TFT color LCD 15"TFT color LCD (with touch panel) Horizontal soft key 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 10+2 Vertical soft key 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 8+1 300is 310is 320is
-4-
B-63943EN/03
Stand-alone type control unit
1.CONFIGURATION
Battery connector
Battery
I/O device interface connector
I/O device interface connector
I/O Link connector
High-speed skip connector
Serial spindle connector Ethernet LED
Ethernet connector
LED for blown fuse check
24-VDC power supply connector
Optional slot 3
[CPD19A] (right) [CPD19B] (left)
Display connector Optional slot 1
Servo unit (FSSB) connector [COP10A-1] (lower) [COP10A-2] (upper) (7)
LED for status indication and maintenance
LED for alarm indication
Optional slot 4
Rotary switch for maintenance (upper), Push switch for maintenance (lower)
Optional slot 2 2-slot rack 4-slot rack GND connection terminal
-5-
1.CONFIGURATION
10.4 LCD unit for the stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i control unit
B-63943EN/03
Soft keys
Soft key connectors
Touch panel connector
Power supply connectors [CP1A] [CP1B] (5.2)
Optical connector for display control [COP21A] (5.2)
NOTE The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
-6-
B-63943EN/03
1.CONFIGURATION
15 LCD unit for the stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i control unit
Soft keys
Fan motor
Fan motor
Rear view
Soft key connectors
Optical connector for display control [COP21M] (5.2)
Power supply connector [CPD18] (5.2)
NOTE The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers. For the display units for the Series 300i/310i/320i, see Chapter 13. For the display units for the Series 300is/310is/320is, see Chapter 11.
-7-
1.CONFIGURATION
B-63943EN/03
1.1.3
Configurations of Optional Boards

Additional axis board
For I/O-Link [JD1A] (8.2) For servo unit [COP10A] (7)
Additional spindle board
For serial spindle [JA41L] (6.1)
Fast data server board
For Ethernet [CD38R] (5.5)
HSSB board
HSSB optical connector [COP21N]
-8-
B-63943EN/03
1.CONFIGURATION
Profibus master board
For Profibus [CN1]
Profibus slave board
For Profibus [CN2]
DeviceNet board
For DeviceNet [TBL]
FL-net board
For FL-net [CD38N]
-9-
1.CONFIGURATION
B-63943EN/03
1.2
1.2.1
HARDWARE OVERVIEW
LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview
Main board - CPU for controlling CNC - Power supply - 2-axis to 24-axis control - Spindle interface - LCD/MDI interface - I/O Link - PMC control function - High-speed DI - RS-232C - Memory card interface - PC function 300is/310is/320is Data server board Data server function Ethernet communication function
Additional axis board Additional axis control function I/O Link Additional spindle board Additional spindle control function HSSB interface board High-speed serial bus interface Basic system
Various types of network boards FL-net board Profibus master board Profibus slave board Device Net board
Options
Unit without optional slots or Unit having two optional slots
On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted.
- 10 -
B-63943EN/03
1.CONFIGURATION
1.2.2
Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview

4 slot rack 2 slot rack
Main board
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 4
Slot 2
Options (Slot 1 to 4) Data server board Data server function Additional axis board Additional axis control function I/O Link Additional spindle board Additional spindle control function HSSB interface board High-speed serial bus interface board Various types of network boards FL-net board Profibus master board Profibus slave board Device Net board
Basic system Main board - CPU for controlling CNC - Power supply - 2-axis to 24-axis control - Spindle interface - DISPLAY interface - I/O Link - PMC control function - High-speed DI - RS-232C - Memory card interface
- 11 -
2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B-63943EN/03
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

LCD display unit Main board 24V-IN(CPD16A) MDI UNIT MDI(CA55) R232-1(JD56A) CK27 RS-232-C I/O unit 5th and 6th serial spindles R232-2(JD36A) HDI(JA40) RS-232-C I/O unit Touch panel High-peed skip input Distributed I/O board CPD1 JA3 JD1B JD1A 24VDC CPD1 Distributed JD1B I/O board, I/O unit, etc. JD1A Manual pulse generator Operator's panel Power magnetics cabinet 24 VDC power supply
24VDC I/O Link(JD51A)
SPDL(JA41) AC reactor 3rd and 4th serial spindles CX1A TB2 CX1B TB1 CX3 PSM CX4 JX1B Circuit breaker 200VAC 200VAC MCC Circuit breaker
Position coder
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A JY2 JA7B SPM TB2 JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B To 2nd spindle TB1 COP10B COP10A TB1 FSSB(COP10A-2) COP10B COP10A COP10B COP10A COP10B COP10A CX2A JX1A TB2 JF1 CX2B JX1B Serial spindle motor
FSSB(COP10A-1)
SVM
Servo motor
SVM
Servo motor
SVM
Servo motor
SVM
Servo motor
(In this figure, a 1-axisamplifier is used.) Separate detector interface unit 1 24VDC CP11A JF101 JF102 COP10B JF103 COP10A JF104 CNF1 JA4A Linear scale, axis 1 Linear scale, axis 2 Linear scale, axis 3 Linear scale, axis 4 Absolute scale battery (Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector interface unit 2 CP11A JF101 JF102 JF103 JF104 ETHERNET(CD38A) Ethernet Linear scale, axis 1 Linear scale, axis 2 Linear scale, axis 3 Linear scale, axis 4
- 12 -
B-63943EN/03
Stand-alone type control unit

Main board Slot 1 24V-IN(CPD19A) 24V-OUT(CPD19B) To I/O device Optical fiber ccable DISPLAY(COP21A) LCD UNIT COP21A,B,M CP1A CP1B (Touch panel) HDI(JA40) High-peed skip input Distributed I/O board CPD1 JA3 JD1B JD1A DC24V CPD1 Distributed I/O board, JD1B I/O unit, JD1A etc. JD1B amplifier JD1A with I/O Link R232-1(JD56A) R232-2(JD36A) 5th, 6th spindles Manual pulse generator Operator's panel Memory card PANEL i or personal computer CA55 MDI UNIT CK27 24 VDC power supply
24VDC
DC24V I/O Link(JD51A)
Power magnetics cabinet Servo motor
RS-232-C I/O device RS-232-C I/O device
SPDL(JA41) AC reactor CX1A TB2 CX1B TB1 CX3 CX4 JX1B Circuit breaker 200VAC 200VAC MCC Circuit breaker
PSM
Position coder 3rd, 4th spindles
CX1A TB1 CX2A SPM JA7B JA7A TB1 CX2B
JX1A JY2 TB2 JX1B Serial spindle motor
Servo card
To 2nd spindle Optical fiber cable CX2A JX1A TB2 SVM JF1 COP10A TB1 CX2B JX1B TB1 COP10B COP10B COP10A COP10B COP10A COP10B COP10A SVM
FSSB(COP10A-1)
Axis 1 servo motor Axis 2 servo motor Axis 3 servo motor Axis 4 servo motor
FSSB(COP10A-2)
SVM
SVM
(In this figure, a 1-axis amplifier is used.) Separate detector interface unit 1 24VDC CP11A JF101 JF102 COP10B COP10A ETHERNET(CD38A) CNF1 Separate detector interface unit 2 Ethernet JF103 JF104 JA4A Linear scale, axis 1 Linear scale, axis 2 Linear scale, axis 3 Linear scale, axis 4 Battery for absolute scale (Required only when an absolute scale is used)
- 13 -

When optional functions are provided Additional spindle board Optional slot
B-63943EN/03
SPDL(JA41L)
PSM
Position coder
7th spindle SPM
Additional axis board FSSB(COP10A-3)
To 8th spindle
COP10B COP10A COP10B COP10A COP10B COP10A COP10B COP10A
SVM
Servo motor
SVM
Servo motor
SVM
Servo motor
SVM
Servo motor
Distributed I/O board 24VDC I/O Link(JD1A) CPD1 JD1B JD1A 24VDC CPD1 JD1B JD1A Distributed I/O board, I/O unit, etc. JA3
Manual pulse generator
Operator's panel
Power magnetics cabinet
- 14 -
B-63943EN/03
When optional functions are provided Fast data server board ATA card The user should provide an ATA card.
Optional slot
ETHERNET(CD38R)
Ethernet
HSSB interface HSSB board

HSSB(COP21N) Personal Computer or PANEL i (Note 1)
Profibus master board PROFI(CN1) Another NC (another Profibus unit)
Profibus slave board PROFI(CN2) Another NC (another Profibus unit)
DeviceNet board
DVNET(TBL)
Another NC (another DeviceNet unit)
FL-net board FLNET(CD38N) FL-net unit
Note 1 The 30i/31i/32i model is still used when a personal computer or PANEL i is connected using an HSSB interface.
- 15 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
3
3.1
3.1.1
INSTALLATION
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET
Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet
The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual "cabinet" refers to the following: Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the control unit or peripheral units; Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for housing the LCD/MDI unit or operator's panel. Equivalent to the above. The following table lists the environmental conditions required in installing these cabinets. Section 3.3 describes the installation and design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Ambient Operating temperature outside Storage, Transport the cabinet Temperature change Normal Humidity Short period (less than 1 month) Operating Vibration Non-operating Meters above sea Operating level Non-operating Environment 0C to 45C -20C to 60C 0.3C/minute or less 75%RH or less, no condensation 95%RH or less, no condensation 0.5G or less 1.0G or less Up to 1000 m (Note) Up to 12000 m Normal machine shop environment (The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a location where the density of dust, coolant, organic solvent, and/or corrosive gas is relatively high.)
NOTE If the CNC is installed 1000 m or higher above sea level, the allowable upper ambient temperature of the CNC in the cabinet is changed as follows. Assume that the allowable upper ambient temperature of the CNC in the cabinet installed 1000 m or higher above sea level decreases by 1.0C for every 100 m rise in altitude. Example) The upper allowable ambient temperature of the CNC in the cabinet installed 1750 m above sea level is: 55C-(1750-1000)/1001.0C=47.5C Therefore, the allowable ambient temperature range is from 0C to 47.5C. When a hard disk is used, there are the following installation conditions: Meters above sea level (operating): -60 to 3000 m Meters above sea level (non-operating): -60 to 12000 m
- 16 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
3.1.2
Installation Conditions of the Control Unit

Condition Operating Storage, Transport Temperature change Normal Short period (less than 1 month) LCD-mounted type control unit and display unit 0C to 58C 20C to 60C 0.3C/minute or less 75%RH or less, no condensation 95%RH or less, no condensation 0.5G or less FANUC conducted an evaluation test under the following conditions: 10 to 58 Hz: 0.075 mm (amplitude) 58 to 500Hz: 1G Direction of vibration: Each of the X, Y, and Z directions Number of sweep cycles: 10 Conforming to IEC60068-2-6 1.0G or less Up to 1000 m (Note in Subsection 3.1.1) Up to 12000 m Coolant, lubricant, or cutting chips shall not be sprinkled directly over the CNC or servo unit. No corrosive gas shall be allowed. Stand-alone type control unit 0C to 55C
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Operating
Meters above sea level Environment
Non-operating Operating Non-operating
NOTE If you want to use a PANEL i, see also Chapter 13.
3.2
3.2.1
POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY

Power Supply Capacities of CNC-related Units
The following CNC-related units require an input power supply that satisfies the indicated current capacities with a power supply voltage of 24 VDC 10%. Here, note that momentary voltage changes and ripples are also within 10% of the power supply voltage.
Table 3.2.1 (a) Power supply capacity Unit Power supply capacity 1.6A 7.2/8.4/10.4 type display unit 2.2A 15 type display unit 1.6A Control unit (alone) 0.7A 10.4 display unit 1.5A 15 display unit 0.3A Additional axis board 0.2A Additional spindle board 0.2A Fast data server board 0.2A HSSB board 0.2A Profibus master board 0.1A Profibus slave board 0.2A FL-net board 0.1A DeviceNet (master) board 0.2A DeviceNet (slave) board
Remarks Note 1) Note 1)
LCD-mounted type control unit Stand-alone type control unit Optional board
- 17 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 The liquid-crystal display and MDI unit are included. Optional boards are not included. 2 When an RS-232C unit (with power supplied from the NC) is connected to the RS-232C port, +1.0A is further required. 3 Use memory cards that consume no more than 2 W. 4 For the PANEL i, see Chapter 13. 5 For the FS300i/310is/320is, see Chapter 11. 6 For other peripheral units (such as I/O units), see Table 3.2.1 (b) and also refer to the relevant manuals. 7 When you select the input DC power supply for the CNC control section, consider the restrictions other than the power supply capacity. Be sure to see also Subsection 4.4.2.
Table 3.2.1 (b) Power supply rating (peripheral units) Power supply capacity 0A 0.4A 0.3A+7.3mADI 0.2A+7.3mADI 0.1A+7.3mADI 0.9A 1.5A
Unit
Remarks
MDI unit Standard machine operators panel Operator's panel I/O module Connector panel I/O module (basic) Connector panel I/O module (additional) Separate detector interface unit Separate detector interface unit
Basic 4-axis unit only Basic 4 axes + additional 4 axes
3.3
CAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL POWER MAGNETICS CABINETS
When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be considered. When mounting FANUC-supplied units, such as displays and operators panels, use packing and fasten the mounting screws with the specified tightening torque. When designing magnetics cabinets, pay due consideration to each item stated in the following CAUTION.
1 2 3
CAUTION The cabinet must be fully closed. The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne dust, coolant, and organic solvent. The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature of each unit is not exceeded. (See Section 3.4.) A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air within. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.) The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the surface of each installed unit. However, do not blow air from the fan directly to the unit, because doing so can readily make dust attach the portion where the air flow hits, leading to possible trouble. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.) For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
- 18 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
CAUTION 5 Each FANUC-supplied unit, such as a display or operators panel, has been designed on the assumption that they will be mounted using packing and with the specified screw tightening torque. Failing to mount them as specified can lead to unit damage and/or malfunction. Be sure to use packing and observe the specified screw tightening torque. (See Sections 3.7 and 3.8.) 6 Failing to use packing or to provide complete sealing, or using any packing not resistant to coolant in use will allow dust, coolant, and organic solvent to get in the cabinet, leading to possible equipment trouble. Be sure to use an appropriate packing and a secure sealing. In addition, use an appropriate packing and a secure sealing for the cable outlets and doors of the machine builder-provided units, such as displays, operators panels, and cabinet pendant boxes. (See Section 3.8.) 7 The LCD must not be installed in such a place that coolant would directly fall onto the unit. 8 Noise must be minimized. As the machine and the control unit are reduced in size, the parts that generate noise may be placed near noise-sensitive parts in the magnetics cabinet. The control unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted to the control unit is necessary. (See Section 3.5.) 9 When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance. The units should be placed so that they can be checked and replaced easily when maintenance is performed. 10 The hard disk drive and floppy disk drive must not be installed near the source of a strong magnetic field. 11 The installation conditions of the I/O unit and connector panel I/O module must be satisfied. In order to secure ventilation in the equipment, mount the I/O unit and connector panel I/O module in the specified orientation. Clearances of 100 mm or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and ventilation. Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit and connector panel I/O module.
Top I/O base unit (No screws or protrusions shall extend from the bottom of this unit.)
Bottom
3.4
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET
The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is described in the following subsections.
- 19 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
3.4.1
Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic Cabinet
The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/C per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the cabinet rises by 1C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet. There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost constant. For example, the operators panel cabinet may contain an LCD-mounted type control unit or the display of a stand-alone type control unit. To keep the temperature in the cabinet at 58C or below when the ambient temperature is 45C, the equation below must be satisfied. Internal heat loss P [W] 6[W/m2C] surface area S[m2] 13[C] of rise in temperature (A cooling capacity of 6 W/C assumes the cabinet is so large that agitation with the fan motor does not make the temperature distribution uniform. For a small cabinet like the operator's panel, a cooling capacity of 8 W/C, indicated in Subsection 3.4.3, may be used.) For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity of 24W/C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 13C under these conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 312W. If the actual internal heat is 360W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 15C or more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be improved using the heat exchanger. For the power magnetic cabinet containing a stand-alone type control unit, the internal temperature rise must be suppressed to 55C or less, instead of 58C.
3.4.2
Heat Output of Each Unit

Table 3.4.2 (a) Heat output Unit Heat output 33 49 30 13 34 4W 3W 3W 4W 5W 2W 5W 2W 4W Remarks (Note) (Note)
LCD-mounted type control unit Stand-alone type control unit
Optional board
7.2/8.4/10.4 type display unit 15 type display unit Control unit (alone) 10.4 display unit 15 display unit Additional axis board Additional spindle board Fast data server board HSSB board Profibus master board Profibus slave board FL-net board DeviceNet (master) board DeviceNet (slave) board
NOTE The liquid-crystal display and MDI unit are included. Optional boards are not included.
Table 3.4.2 (b) Heat output Heat output 0W 15W 12W 8W 5W Note 1) Note 1) Note 1) Note 1)
Unit MDI unit Standard machine operators panel Operator's panel I/O module Connector panel I/O module (basic) Connector panel I/O module (additional)
Remarks
- 20 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
Unit Heat output 9W 14W Remarks Basic 4-axis unit only Note 2) Basic 4 axes + additional 4 axes Note 2)
Separate detector interface unit Separate detector interface unit
NOTE 1 The indicated values are when 50% of the module input signals are ON. 2 Heat output generated within the separate detector is not included.
3.4.3
Thermal Design of Operator's Panel
With a small cabinet like the operator's panel, the heat dissipating capacity of the cabinet is as shown below, assuming that there is sufficient mixing of the air inside the cabinet. Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2C Plastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2C An example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.3 is shown below.
Fig. 3.4.3
Assume the following. Thermal exchange rates Coated metal surfaces : 8 W/m2C Plastic surfaces : 3.7 W/m2C Allowable temperature rise : 13C higher than the exterior temperature Also, assume the following. Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.3: 560(W) 470(H) 150(D) mm
- 21 -
3.INSTALLATION
Surface area of metallic sections Surface area of plastic sections : : 0.5722 m2 0.2632 m2
B-63943EN/03
In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is: 8 0.5722 13 + 3.7 0.2632 13 = 72 W. In consequence, it can be concluded that the units shown in Table 3.4.3 on the next page can be installed in this cabinet.
Table 3.4.3 LCD-mounted type control unit (10.4 LCD) Optional board (Fast data server board) Optional board (Additional axis board) Standard machine operator's panel 120-mm square fan motor for air mixing Total heat dissipation of the above 33W 3W 4W 15W 8W 63W
NOTE The 15 W quoted for the standard machine operator's panel represents an example heat output value when half of all the input signals are turned on. This value varies, depending on the mechanical configuration.
3.5
COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE AND GROUNDING
In general, noise can occur because of electrostatic coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground loop and get in a control unit. On the control unit side, due consideration is paid to a protective measure for external noise. However, it is hard to measure the magnitude and frequency of noise quantitatively and there are lots of uncertainties with noise. So, it is important to take measures for minimizing noise occurrence and keeping any noise from entering the control unit in order to enhance stability in CNC-based machine tool system operation. Grounding the power magnetics cabinet and devices is very important to prevent an electric shock and suppress a noise influence. The CNC system uses the following three types of grounding: (1) Signal grounding This type of grounding is used to supply a reference potential (0 V) for the electrical signal system. (2) Frame grounding This type of grounding is used for safety reasons as well as to suppress external and internal noise. For example, grounding is provided for the device frames, panels, and shielding on the interface cables connecting the devices. (3) System grounding (PE) This type of grounding is used to connect frame grounds, which are provided for the individual devices or between the units, to the ground as a system at a single point. When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the machine as described in the following section.
- 22 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
3.5.1
3.5.1.1
Grounding as Noise Suppression Measures Grounding methods
Typically, noise that becomes a problem is highfrequency noise. To suppress highfrequency noise, it is important that the devices are grounded at low impedance(NOTE). The grounding schemes for this purpose are described below.
NOTE Impedance includes a resistance component that converts electric current to heat as well as a component called reactance, and indicates a characteristic of resistance to the flow of alternating current at a certain frequency.
(1) Multipoint grounding scheme

In this grounding scheme, when grounded at sufficiently low impedance, the cabinet metal plates are used as ground plates, to which grounding is provided in the vicinity of each device. This scheme has a great effect of suppressing highfrequency noise because it enables grounding to the lowimpedance metal plates of the cabinet in the shortest distance. However, the noise suppression effect depends on the cabinet structure because the cabinet metal plates are used as ground plates. See Subsection 3.5.1.2 for the cabinet. Fig. 3.5.1.1 (a) is a schematic wiring diagram.
Cabinet (Lower-impedance metal plates)

i PS i SP i SV
JF*
Pendant box (Lower-impedance metal plates)
Ground bar for shield clamp
Control unit
Connect the unit to a metal plate close to it. However, keep signal grounding points at least 10 cm away from power wire grounding points.
Connection at low impedance
Machine operators panel
24 V output power
AC input
Signal line Power line
Machine side
Motor
PE terminal (for connecting external protective conductor) (Do not coat mating surfaces.)
Separate the signal line and power line when routing them.
Grounding electrode or main grounding terminal
Frame grounding System grounding (PE)
Fig. 3.5.1.1 (a) Schematic diagram for multipoint grounding scheme
When the multipoint grounding scheme is adopted, the units can be grounded at low impedance, and ground wires (wires from the units ground terminal to a grounding plate) can be shortened, so that wiring may be simplified.
- 23 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
CAUTION If it is impossible to configure cabinet metal plates with a low impedance, it is likely that noise may effect grounding circuits shared by power wires and signal wires.
(2) Singlepoint grounding scheme

In this grounding scheme, grounding separation is achieved between the signal system and power system, and grounding is provided at a single point to suppress the noise influence of the power system on the signal system. This scheme tends to need longer connection wires for grounding the devices. To produce a sufficient effect of suppressing highfrequency noise, it is therefore necessary to use largerdiameter wires or use two or more wires for each connection. Fig. 3.5.1.1 (b) is a schematic wiring diagram.
Cabinet
i PS i SP i SV
Pendant box
JF*
Ground bar for shield clamp
Control unit
Machine operators panel
Power system ground bar

24 V output power
Signal system ground bar
Achieve grounding separation between the signal system and power system.
AC input
Signal line Signal system ground bar

PE terminal (for connecting external protective conductor)
Machine side
Motor
Power line
Separate the signal line and power line when routing them.
Grounding electrode or main grounding terminal
Frame grounding System grounding (PE)
Fig. 3.5.1.1 (b) Schematic diagram for multipoint grounding scheme
3.5.1.2
Cabinet
A cabinet is an important element in improving noise immunity and suppressing radiated noise. One of the causes of problems related to noise immunity and radiated noise is faulty electrical continuity between the metal plates that make up the cabinet. Typically, noise that becomes a problem is highfrequency noise, against which measures must be taken in the cabinet design.
- 24 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
(1) Basic cabinet structure

A cabinet should basically be made of metal. To improve noise immunity, there must be lowimpedance electrical continuity between the metal plates that make up the cabinet, which are the side plates, top plate, and bottom plate, and a weldingtype cabinet structure is recommended. As for a cabinet welding method, bead welding is more suitable than spot welding for providing lowimpedance electrical continuity between the metal plates. For an assemblytype cabinet structure, provide electrical continuity by bringing the metal plates into direct contact with each other, without applying a coating to their joint surface areas. In a structure that has the metal plates connected only with wires because of structural constraints, lowimpedance connections are more difficult to make than in a structure in which welding is made or the metal plates are brought into direct contact with each other. It is necessary to maintain sufficient levels of items such as the crosssectional area of a wire to use, continuity of connections, and contact areas.
Bead welding
Bring the metal plates into direct contact with each other, without applying a coating to their joint areas.
Fig. 3.5.1.2 (a) Cabinet structure
NOTE Explained above is how to provide cabinets with low-impedance electrical continuity so as to increase noise immunity and to suppress noise radiation. See Subsection 3.5.2 for conditions required to configure protective grounding circuits.
(2) Mounting units on the cabinet

The shortest possible lengths of unit ground wires (wires from the units ground terminal to a grounding plate) should be used to make connections. A ground wire with a small conductor diameter causes impedance to high-frequency noise to become particularly higher, leading to an insufficient grounding effect. For the location of the ground terminal of each unit, refer to the manual relevant to the unit. The following shows the recommended method by which the metal plate with the unit mounted is installed on the cabinet. Care should be taken so that the cabinet and metal plate are connected to each other on their broad areas with no coating. It is not recommended that electrical continuity be provided only by screws, because impedance to high frequency cannot be sufficiently low.
- 25 -
3.INSTALLATION
<Good example>
Coating mask
B-63943EN/03
Cabinet Metal plate Unit
Coating
Screw
Metal plate
Cabinet
Shortest connection with thick ground wire
Continuity on areas with no coating
<Bad example>
Cabinet Metal plate Unit
Continuity only by screw in a coated area
Thin ground wire, long ground wire
Fig. 3.5.1.2 (b) Installing a unit in a cabinet
- 26 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
3.5.2
Protective Ground (Grounding for Protection against Indirect Contact)
Protection against indirect contract is intended to prevent the risk that may occur in a conductive portion which is not charged with electricity (applied with voltage) during normal operation but may be charged with electricity if insulation is accidentally destroyed. It must be implemented by: - measures to prevent the occurrence of a touch voltage, or - automatic disconnection of the supply before the time of contact with a touch voltage can become hazardous As for protective grounding in automatic disconnection of the supply before the time of contact with a touch voltage can become hazardous, follow any standards the machine tool is supposed to meet. Some standard examples follow: Regarding protection against indirect contract IEC 60364-4-41:2001 and JIS C 60364-4-41:2006 (Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4-41: Protection for safety - Protection against electric shock) 413 Regarding the minimum cross-sectional area of protective conductors IEC 60204-1:2005 and JIS B 9960-1:2008 (Safety of Machinery Electrical Equipment of Machines Part 1: General Requirements) 8.2.2 NFPA 79:2007 (Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery) 8.2.2 Equipment Grounding (Protective) Conductors and Bonding Jumpers NFPA 79:2007 (Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery) 18.2 Continuity of the Equipment Grounding (Protective Bonding) Circuit Regarding the cross-sectional area of a protective conductor shared by multiple circuits IEC 60364-5-54:2002 and JIS C 60364-5-54:2006 (Electrical installations of buildings Part 5-54: Selection and erection of electrical equipment Earthing arrangements, protective conductors and protective bonding conductors) 543.1.4 Regarding use of enclosures (cabinets) or frames as protective conductors IEC 60204-1:2005 and JIS B 9960-1:2008 (Safety of Machinery Electrical Equipment of Machines Part 1: General Requirements) 8.2.3 IEC 60364-5-54:2002 and JIS C 60364-5-54:2006 (Electrical installations of buildings Part 5-54: Selection and erection of electrical equipment Earthing arrangements, protective conductors and protective bonding conductors) 543.2.2, 543.2.3; NFPA 79:2007 (Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery) 12.2.1 Conductor Material
- 27 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
3.5.3
Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit
Continuity between the control units and a 0 V terminals

CAUTION In each control unit, the 0 V and ground terminals are electrically connected to each other. So, do not connect any external units 0 V connected to the control units 0 V to any other lines grounding electrode that can have an electrical potential different from that of the grounding electrode connected to the control unit.
Machine Control unit Control signal Output signal Relay I/O module DOCOM Power magnetics cabinet +24V 24 VDC output power 0V
0V
0V
Control units ground terminal
Machine-side main ground terminal (main ground bus)
Grounding electrode
Fig. 3.5.3 (a) Continuity between the control units ground and 0 V terminals
- 28 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
Connecting the ground terminal of an LCD-mounted type control unit

Connect the 0 V line in the control unit to the cabinets metal plate or signal system ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal (see below).
Rear view Side view
Protective ground terminal M4 stud)
Electric wire 2 (2 mm or thicker) Protective ground tap on cabinets metal plate Signal system ground bar Multiple-point grounding Single-point grounding
Fig. 3.5.3 (b) Ground terminal connection
- 29 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
Connecting the ground terminal of a stand-alone type control unit

Connect an electronics circuits 0 V line in the control unit to the cabinets metal plate or signal system ground bar close to it via the signal ground terminal. Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B-0166-K330).
Front Side
4-slot rack 2-slot rack
Signal ground terminal (Faston terminal) Electric wire 2 (2 mm or thicker)
Signal system ground bar Multiple-point grounding: Connect the 0 V line to a nearby metal plate connected electrically to a grounding electrode. Single-point grounding Frame ground Connect the 0 V line to the signal ground bar connected electrically to a grounding electrode. Frame ground
Fig. 3.5.3 (c) Ground terminal connection
- 30 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
3.5.4
Separating Signal Lines
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the following table. Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group Table 3.5.4 Cable grouping Signal line Primary AC power line Secondary AC power line AC/DC power lines (containing the power lines for the servo and spindle motors) AC/DC solenoid AC/DC relay DC solenoid (24 VDC) DC relay (24 VDC) DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and power magnetics cabinet DI/DO cable between the I/O unit and machine 24 VDC input power cables connected to the control unit and its peripherals I/O Link cable Cable for the position coder Cable for the manual pulse generator C Cable for the MDI RS232C interface cable Cable for the battery Cable for the Ethernet Other cables for which shield processing is specified
(Note 3)
Action
Bind the cables in group A separately (Note 1) from groups B and C, or cover group A with an electromagnetic shield (Note 2). See Subsection 3.5.5 and connect spark killers or diodes with the solenoid and relay. Connect diodes with the DC solenoid and relay. Bind the cables in group B separately from group A, or cover group B with an electromagnetic shield. Separate group B as far from group C as possible. It is desirable to apply shield processing described in Subsection 3.5.6. Bind the cables in group C separately from group A, or cover group C with an electromagnetic shield. Separate group C as far from group B as possible. Be sure to perform shield processing as described in Subsection 3.5.6.
NOTE 1 Binding the cables in one group separately from another means that the groups are placed 10 cm or more apart from one another. 2 Covering a group with an electromagnetic shield means that shielding is provided between groups with grounded steel plates. 3 The shield is not required when the cable for the MDI is no more than 50 cm in length.
- 31 -
3.INSTALLATION
C a bine t P e nda nt b ox
B-63943EN/03
24V D C pow e r sup ply
S p in dle a m p lifie r
S e rvo a m p lifie r
I/O U n it D uc t
C ontrol un it
U nit rece ivin g AC volta ge
T o m otor an d th e like
S hielding pla te
C a ble of g rou p A
C ab le o f group B , C
S ection of duc t
G roup A
G rou p B , C
S hielding pla te
Fig. 3.5.4 Cable layout example
3.5.5
Noise Suppressor
Actuators, such as solenoids and relays, used in power magnetics cabinets need a noise suppressor. Because an actuator, which converts electrical energy to mechanical action, is an inductive load, it resonates with the parasitic capacitance in a circuit containing it, when it works on and off, thus generating intermittent arcs accompanied by abrupt voltage rises and falls at its contacts, hence electromagnetic waves interfering with electronics circuits. As a remediation measure, treat the inductive load as described below. 1) While referencing the processing for cable groups A and B described in Subsection 3.5.4, Separating Signal Lines, apply a CR snubber circuit and a diode, respectively, to an inductive load in an AC circuit and that in a DC circuit. 2) When selecting a CR snubber or diode, observe the following cautions.
Cautions for selecting and using a CR snubber

Use a CR snubber in an AC circuit. A varistor, voltage clamping element, can limit the peak of an oscillating voltage waveform but cannot relax an abrupt voltage transition . For this reason, we recommend using a CR snubber rather than the varistor. Determine the rating of the resistor and capacitor in the CR snubber according to the steady-state current I (A) and DC resistance RL () of the inductive load as follows: 1) CR snubber resistance: R RL() 2)
2 2 CR snubber capacitance: I C I (F) 10 20
Place the CR snubber close to the inductive load to minimize its wiring.
- 32 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
Inductive load (such as relay
CR snubber
Motor
General-purpose induction motor
Fig. 3.5.5 (a) Example of applying a CR snubber
Cautions for selecting and using a diode

A diode (freewheeling diode) can be used as a noise suppressor for a DC driver circuit. Determine the ratings of the diode according to the drive voltage and current for the inductive load (such as a solenoid coil, relay, or motor) as follows: 1) Voltage rating: Approximately twice the voltage applied to the inductive load 2) Current rating: Approximately twice the steady-state current flowing through the inductive load Place the diode close to the inductive load in order to minimize its wiring.
+
Inductive load (such as a relay
Diode
3.5.5 (b) Example of applying a diode
3.5.6
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing
Some cables that are drawn into the control unit, servo amplifier, or spindle amplifier need shielding (basically, every signal line needs shielding). Clamp all these cables in the way shown below. This type of clamping works for both cable supporting and shielding. Be sure to make clamping because it is quite important to make system operation stable. Clamping shield correctly can suppress effect from external noise. Partially peel the sheath off a cable and expose the shield, and press the exposed portion against the ground bar with the clamp. Care should be taken so that the ground bar and shield have a surface contact in a larger area. (See the figure below.) The machine builder is requested to prepare the ground bar for cable clamping and place it as shown below. When the multipoint grounding scheme is used, care should be taken so that the ground bar for the shield clamp and cabinet are connected at low impedance by, for example, preventing the cabinet side contact surface from being coated.
- 33 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
When using an in-line connector or the like to split a cable, it is necessary to connect the shield of one portion of the cable and that of the other portion and to keep the total impedance of the two cable portions from becoming high. Even if the connector is placed at the inlet of the cabinet, it is also necessary to use the shield for the intra-cabinet portion of the cable all the way to the other end of the cable.
Ground bar for shield clamp Cable Metal fittings for clamp
40 mm to 80 mm
Fig. 3.5.6 (a) Cable clamp (1)
NOTE 1 Select a cable with a proper length. 2 If the cable is too long, the noise immunity may be reduced or noise may be caused on other cables. In addition, when the excess length is coiled, the inductance is increased and a high voltage is induced during turning on or off of signals. This may cause a failure or a malfunction due to noise. 3 Bundle and clamp the shields of cables that lead into the control unit or amplifier at a point, respectively, close to the unit or amplifier.
Control unit
Cabinet
Ground bar for shield clamp Metal fittings for clamp Shield
Fig. 3.5.6 (b) Cable clamp (2)
- 34 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
Prepare a ground bar for cable clamping shown below.
Ground terminal (grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp Mount screw hole
Fig. 3.5.6 (c) Ground bar for shield clamp (outline drawing)
The ground bar for cable clamping must be made of a steel plate at least 2 mm thick and plated with nickel.
8 Ground bar for shield clamp
12
20
(Unit: mm)
Fig. 3.5.6 (d) Ground bar for shield clamp (hole arrangement and dimension drawing)
Max. 55 Reference)
28
17 (Unit: mm)
Fig. 3.5.6 (e) Clamping metal fixture (outline drawing)
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp A02B-0303-K001 (8 pieces)
- 35 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
3.5.7
Lightning Surge Absorber Installation
It is recommended to install a surge absorber between input power lines and between input power lines and the ground in order to protect equipment from thunderbolt-caused voltage surges. However, installing a surge absorber does not always ensure protection from lightning surges. For recommended lightning surge absorbers, refer to your respective servo amplifier descriptions.
Installation procedure
The surge-absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to lightening must be installed in the input power unit as shown in the figure below. The figure below shows an example in which an insulating transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an insulating transformer is installed, surge-absorbing element 2 (between line and ground) is not required.
Circuit breaker
(MCCB) R AC input S T PE
To control power input for control unit 24 VDC power and control power supply input of Power Supply for servo amplifier
Magnetic contactor
Circuit breaker (MCCB)
Insulating transformer
Circuit breaker
AC reactor
(MCCB)
Circuit breaker
To main circuit power input of Power Supply for servo amplifier
(5A,MCCB)
To other electric parts on the machine
b
Surge-absorbing element 1 (between lines)
Surge-absorbing element 2 (between line and ground)
Fig. 3.5.7 Example of installing lightning surge absorbers on 200 VAC lines
CAUTION 1 For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy line must be as short as possible. Wire size : Cross-sectional area at least 2 mm2 large Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for the connection of surge-absorbing element 1 and that (b) of surge-absorbing element 2 must be 2 m or less. 2 If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages (1000 VAC and 1500 VAC) to the power line, remove surge-absorbing element 2. Otherwise, the overvoltages would activate the element.
- 36 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
CAUTION 3 The circuit breaker (5A) is a short circuit protection of lines if the surge-absorbing elements result in short circuit breakdown due to the absorption of an excessive amount of energy. NOTE The circuit breaker (5A) can be used also for other electric parts on the machine because no current flows through surge-absorbing elements 1 and 2 in the normal state. The other electric parts on the machine can be the control power supply of Power Supply for servo unit and the power supply for the fan motor for a spindle motor.
3.6
3.6.1
CONTROL UNIT
Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit
The control unit has a built-in fan motor. Air enters the control unit through the bottom and is drawn through the fan motor which is located on the top of the control unit. Space A , shown in Fig. 3.6.1, must be provided to ensure unrestricted air flow. Also, space B should be provided whenever possible. When space B cannot be provided, ensure that nothing is placed in the immediate vicinity which could obstruct the air flow.
AIR FLOW A A AIR FLOW A
50
Unit rear panel
50
Fig. 3.6.1
- 37 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
3.6.2
Installing the Stand-alone Type Control Unit
The control unit is equipped with a fan motor. Air is fed into the bottom of the unit and output from the fan motor mounted on the top of the unit. The spaces shown in Fig. 3.6.2 (areas A and B ) are always required to ensure smooth air flow. Also, adequate service access space is required in front of and at the top of the unit so that printed circuit boards and the fan motor can be replaced easily if necessary. There is a spare connector located at the far end (at middle height) on the right side of the control unit. This connector is used for controller testing and other purposes. Therefore, space (area C ) for handling the connector is required.
Space for air flow, and access area for fan replacement
2-slot rack: Approx. 65 4-slot rack: Approx. 95
30
Approx. 180 A
50
Access space for spare connector
380
Spare connector
50
80
Sufficient space for replacing a printed circuit board is required.
Fig. 3.6.2
Unit: mm
- 38 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
3.7
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS AND GROUND TERMINALS
The following table lists the tightening torque for screws and nuts used to fasten the units (except those having molded mounting parts) explained herein and ground terminals in the units.
Screw and nut diameter Tightening torque
M3 M4
0.8 to 1.0 Nm 1.6 to 2.0 Nm
The following table lists the tightening torque for screws and nuts used to fasten those units having molded mounting parts, such as stand-alone control units and separate detector interface units.
Screw and nut diameter Tightening torque
M4 M5
1.1 to 1.5 Nm 2.4 to 2.8 Nm
CAUTION Be sure to observe the rules listed above when tightening screws. If screws are tightened too weakly or too strongly, it is likely that the unit may drop, break, or malfunction. For units having a touch panel in particular, be sure to observe the above rules. Failing to observe them can cause the touch panel to malfunction. NOTE For units having different installation conditions specified herein, observe them first.
3.8
DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES
When designing and manufacturing cabinets or pendant boxes for housing displays and operators panels, they are requested to observe the following cautions to make their structures resistant to intrusion of dust, cutting chips, coolant, organic solvent, and oil mist because these cabinets and pendant boxes are susceptible to them. 1) The cabinet and pendant box must be of a hermetically sealed structure. 2) Apply packing to the panel mounting surface to which a display and operator's panel are to be mounted. 3) Make sure that the door packing of the cabinet and pendant box is sealed firmly. 4) For a cabinet or pendant box with a rear cover, apply packing to the mounting surface. 5) Make sure that the cable entrance is sealed with packing, connectors for conduits, etc. 6) Make sure that all other openings are blocked, if any. 7) Pay due consideration to keep the display and operators panel from direct exposure to cutting chips and coolant; do not let any coolant come into contact with them. 8) Coolant can readily form puddles on the cabinet and pendant box and may drop on the panel surface of the display and operators panel. Use such a structure that can prevent coolant from forming puddles on the display and operators panel or dropping on the panel surface.
- 39 -
3.INSTALLATION
B-63943EN/03
WARNING Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level, oil-free coolants called synthetic, and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level, in particular, can largely affect the CNC and peripheral units. Please note that, even if consideration is taken to protect them from direct exposure to these coolants, the following trouble is likely to occur. - Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it corrodes metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly leading to a defective component. - Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example, PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow into the equipment through, for example, gaskets, or packing. It is likely that, if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the insulation and damage the components. - Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.
- 40 -
B-63943EN/03
3.INSTALLATION
When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing. Any extra cut can let coolant get in the cabinet through the screw hole, causing trouble.
Packing Screw hole
*) When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing.
Any extra cut can let coolant get in the cabinet through the screw hole. Packing Screw hole
Packing for LCD units, MDI units, and standard machine operators panels
When using packing to install a LCD unit, MDI unit, or standard machine operators panel in a cabinet or pendant box, be careful not to pinch the packing between the mounting surface of the cabinet or pendant box and the brim of the unit being installed.
When attaching packing, be careful not to pinch it.
Cabinet, pendant box
LCD unit, MDI unit, standard machine operators panel
Packing
- 41 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B-63943EN/03
4
4.1 4.2
4.2.1
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

GENERAL
This chapter explains the connection of power supply for control unit.
TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT

Power Supply for the Control Unit
Supply power (24VDC) to the control unit from an external sources. Provide an ON/OFF circuit for turning the AC power on and off outside the unit as shown in Fig. 4.2.1. To minimize the effect of noise or voltage fluctuations to the CNC, it is recommended that a power to the CNC be provided independently of the power sources to devices with large noise or load fluctuations. When the 30i series with PC functions is used, apply countermeasures to guard against the possible destruction of hard disk storage due to momentary power failure or power outage, by installing an uninterruptible power supply, etc. See Section 3.2 for power capacity.
Fig. 4.2.1
4.2.2
External 24 VDC Power Specification and Circuit Configuration
Specifications of recommended external 24 VDC power supply (regulated power supply): (The power supply must satisfy UL1950.) Output voltage: +24 V 10% (21.6 V to 26.4 V) (including ripple voltage and noise. See the figure below.)
- 42 -
B-63943EN/03
Output current: The continuous load current must be larger than the current consumption of the CNC. (At the maximum temperature inside the power magnetics cabinet in which the power supply is located) Load fluctuations (including rush current): The output voltage must not go out of the above range due to load fluctuations by external DO and other factors. Instantaneous input interruption retention time: 10 ms (for -100%), 20 ms (for -50%) Allowable 24-VDC instantaneous interruption time: 0.5 ms (lower than 21.6 V)
Fig 4.2.2 (a) Timing chart
Notes to take when the vertical axis exists
When the vertical axis exists, select the DC power supply that has a long voltage hold time to decrease the amount of vertical axis falling during power-off (including a power failure). If the operating voltage drops to less than or equal to 21.6V, the CNC releases servo activation. Therefore, when the hold time for 24 VDC during AC power-off is too short, servo activation is released before the breaks are applied because some peripheral circuit detects power-off. This may increase the amount of vertical axis falling. Generally, a power supply with sufficient power capacity tends to increase the hold time during power-off.
- 43 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION Circuit configurations Forbidden

The following circuit configurations are not recommended.
B-63943EN/03
<1> Circuit examples that cannot retain the output voltage at an instantaneous interruption (the voltage reduces to 21.6 V or below)
Example 1 Rectifier circuit
AC input
CNC unit
Example 2 Rectifier circuit
AC input
CNC unit
NOTE The rectifier circuit means a circuit using diodes for full-wave rectification.
<2> Circuit examples that exceed the output voltage specifications (21.6 V to 26.4 V) due to an abrupt load change
Example 1 AC input Regulated power supply
CNC unit
Device with remarkable load fluctuations
Example 2 Regulated power supply
AC input
CNC unit
Device with large rush current
For a circuit configuration in <2>, connect another regulated power supply to be specifically used for the device with remarkable load fluctuations so that the CNC and other units are not affected. Avoid the use of a configuration in <2> if possible, even in an environment with small load fluctuations or rush current. When two or more units are connected to the same power supply, the 24-VDC power may not be turned on due to a failure in a unit other than the CNC. If this happens, it takes much time to locate the failure because the CNC cannot start and no alarm indication is provided.
- 44 -
B-63943EN/03
When the CNC and other units are connected to the same power supply because of limited space for the power magnetics cabinet or for some other reason, careful consideration must be given to possible rush currents and voltage fluctuations. In addition, to prevent noise from the power lines from getting on the CNC, consider inserting a noise filter in front of the CNC (Recommended noise filter: ZGB2203-01U manufactured by TDK). When a noise filter is inserted, however, the CNC may be vulnerable to some other noise from its surroundings. The noise filter should therefore be applied after due verification of its operation.
Recommended
The following circuit configuration is recommended. The power to the CNC and other units (FANUC I/O Unit MODEL A (I/O Unit-A), FANUC Servo Unit series with an I/O link ( amplifier with an I/O link), and so on in the sample configuration below) is assumed to be turned on or off at the same time. (The power to any unit is not assumed to be turned on during operation or before the power to the CNC is turned on.
On/off circuit Regulated power supply
AC input
CNC unit
I/O Unit-A
amplifier with an I/O link
Regulated power supply
Device with large noise or load fluctuations
Fig 4.2.2 (b)
Caution
Turning the power to units on simultaneously when turning the power to the CNC: When the following power-on timing condition is satisfied, the power to units is assumed to be turned on simultaneously when the power to the CNC is turned on.
On Power to the CNC Off t1 Power to units (including the Power Mate) On Off t2
t1:200ms Means that the power to units (including the Power Mate) is turned on within 200 ms before the power to the CNC is turned on.
- 45 -
B-63943EN/03
t2:-500ms Means that the power to units (including the Power Mate) is turned on within 500 ms after the power to the CNC is turned on. Turning the power to units off simultaneously when turning the power to the CNC off: This means that the power to units may be turned off within 500 ms before the power to the CNC control unit is turned off. If the power to units is turned off earlier, alarm information is left in the NC.
On Power to the CNC Off t1
t1:500ms Means that the power to units are turned off within 500 ms before the power to the CNC is turned off. The power to the CNC must not be turned on or off with the power to units on.
4.2.3
1 2 3
Power-on Sequence
Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following sequence:
Power to the overall machine (200 VAC) Servo amplifier control power supply (200 VAC) Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O link, the separate detector interface unit, and the stand-alone type LCD unit (24 VDC), power to the CNC controller (24 VDC), power to the separate detector (scale)
As for a PANEL i, no specific power turn-on sequence for the CNC control unit is required.
4.2.4
1 2 3
Power-off Sequence
Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the following sequence:
Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O link, the separate detector interface unit, and the stand-alone type LCD unit (24 VDC), power to the CNC controller (24 VDC) Servo amplifier control power supply (200 VAC), power to the separate detector (scale) Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)
When turning off the power of the CNC controller, be sure to turn off the power of units such as the slave I/O devices connected through I/O Link, amplifier with I/O Link, Power Mate and separate detector interface unit, stand-alone type LCD unit, control power supply of the servo amplifier, and separate detector (such as a scale). As for a PANEL i, no specific power-off sequence for the CNC control unit is required.
CAUTION When the PANEL i is used, the OS must be shut down before the power to the control unit is turned off. Be careful not to turn off the power while the hard disk is being accessed or before the OS has terminated; otherwise, the hardware contents may be destroyed.
When the power is turned off or when the power is momentarily disconnected, processing must be performed from the machine as necessary, because motor control is disabled.
- 46 -
B-63943EN/03
For example, when movement along a vertical axis is controlled, a brake should be applied to prevent falling. Usually, the brake clamps the motor when the servo is not activated or when the motor is not turning. The clamp is released only when the motor is turning. When servo axis control is disabled by power-off or momentary power disconnection, the brake usually clamps the servo motor. In this case, before the relay for clamping operates, the controlled axis may fall. So, also consider whether the distance the axis is likely to fall will cause a problem. When the power is turned off: Be sure to apply a brake for clamping before turning off the power to CNC. When the power fails: If a power failure is detected, a brake must be applied immediately. Select the power supply with a longer DC power retention time after AC power-off, because the servo is deactivated if the power to CNC is turned off.
4.3
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT

CNC control unit CPD16A 1 2 3 +24V 0V 24VDC stabilized power 24VDC 10% External power
Supply the power to the control unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
Cable CPD16A AMP Japan 1-178288-3 (housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) +24V (1) 0V (2)
External power Select a source that meets the external power terminal.
Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830(5m) (Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)
As for an stand-alone type control unit, part of the 24 VDC power input to CPD19A can be taken out from CPD19B by branching. CPD19B should be connected as shown below. In this case, the rating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CPD19A must be the sum of the power consumed within the control unit and that supplied to external equipment via CPD19B. Up to 1.0 A can be supplied to the external equipment.
- 47 -

CNC control unit CPD19B 1 2 3 +24V 0V External device
B-63943EN/03
Cable
CPD19B AMP Japan 2-178288-3 (Housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) +24V (1) 0V (2)
External device Select a connector that matches the pin layout of the external device.
4.4
BATTERIES
In a system using this CNC, batteries are used as follows:

Use Memory backup in the CNC control unit BIOS data backup in the PANEL i Preservation of the current position indicated by the separate absolute pulse coder Preservation of the current position indicated by the absolute pulse coder built into the motor Component connected to battery CNC control unit PANEL i Separate detector interface unit Servo amplifier
Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate local ordinances or rules. When discarding batteries, insulate them by using tape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from short-circuiting.
4.4.1
Battery for Memory Backup in the CNC Control Unit (3 VDC)
Offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM memory in the control unit. The power to the SRAM memory is backed up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can maintain the contents of memory for about a year. When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message "BAT" blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within two or three weeks, however, this depends on the system configuration. If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the battery. FANUC thus recommends that the battery be replaced periodically, once a year, regardless of whether a battery alarm is issued. The following two kinds of batteries can be used. Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
- 48 -
B-63943EN/03
Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.
NOTE A lithium battery is installed as standard at the factory.
4.4.1.1
Replacing the lithium battery
Replacing battery for LCD-mounted type control unit

- Replacement procedure
When a lithium battery is used Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC specification: A98L-0031-0012)). 1 Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off the power. 2 Remove the old battery from the backside of the CNC control unit. First, pull the battery cable to unplug the connector. Then, remove the battery from the battery case. The battery case of a control unit without optional slots is located at the rear of the unit as shown in the figure below. The battery case of a control unit with optional slots is located next to the fan on the top of the unit. 3 Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector. 4 Clamp the battery cable as shown in Fig. 4.4.1 (a).
Connector
Battery case Lithium battery A02B-0200-K102
Fig. 4.4.1 (a) Unit without optional slots
- 49 -
B-63943EN/03
Battery case
Connector
Lithium battery A02B-0200-K102
Fig. 4.4.1 (b) Unit with optional slots
Battery cable
Fig. 4.4.1 (c) Clamping the battery cable
WARNING Using other than the recommended battery may result in the battery exploding. Replace the battery only with the specified battery (A02B-0200-K102). CAUTION Steps 1 to 3 should be completed within 30 minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost. If steps 1 to 3 may not be completed within 30 minutes, save all contents of the SRAM memory to the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the contents of the SRAM memory are lost, the contents can be restored easily. For the method of operation, refer to Maintenance manual.
When discarding a battery, observe the applicable ordinances or other rules of your local government. Also, cover the terminals of the battery with vinyl tape or the like to prevent a short-circuit.
Replacing the battery for stand-alone type control unit

Replacing the battery
If a lithium battery is used, have A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC internal code: A98L-0031-0012) handy. 1 Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off. 2 Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit. First, pull the battery cable to unplug the connector. Then, remove the battery from the battery case. The battery case is provided in the top area of the face plate of the main CPU board. 3 Replace the battery, then connect the connector.
- 50 -
B-63943EN/03
WARNING Using other than the recommended battery may result in the battery exploding. Replace the battery only with the specified battery (A02B-0200-K102). CAUTION Steps 1 to 3 should be completed within 30 minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost. If steps 1 to 3 may not be completed within 30 minutes, save all contents of the SRAM memory to the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the contents of the SRAM memory are lost, the contents can be restored easily. For the method of operation, refer to Maintenance manual.
Discard the dead battery, observing appropriate municipal rules and regulations. When discarding the battery, insulate the terminal with a tape so that no short-circuit would occur.
Replacing the alkaline dry cells (size D)

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D). Leave the power to the CNC turned on for 30 seconds or so. Turn the CNC off. Remove the battery case cover. Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation. Replace the battery case cover.
NOTE When replacing the dry cells, use the same procedure as that for lithium battery replacement procedure, described above.
- 51 -
B-63943EN/03
Dry cell 2
Cover
Connection terminal on the rear Mounting hole 4
Battery case
Use of alkaline dry cells (size D)

Connection
Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to which the lithium battery is connected. The lithium battery, provided as standard, can be replaced with external batteries in the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) according to the battery replacement procedures described above.
- 52 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 Install the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in a location where the batteries can be replaced even when the control unit power is on. 2 The battery cable connector is attached to the control unit by means of a simple lock system. To prevent the connector from being disconnected due to the weight of the cable or tension within the cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the connector. 3 Separate this battery cable from any part that generates noise such as a power line.
4.4.2
Batteries for PANEL i (3VDC)
A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the CNC display unit with PC functions. This battery is factory-set in the PANEL i. This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year. If the voltage of a battery drops, the following message is displayed on the screen for a self-test performed immediately after power-on, and the self-test pauses. CMOS Battery Failure **System Stopped by Temperature / Fan / Battery Alarm. Turn off the Power. ** If this condition occurs, replace the battery as soon as possible (within one week). FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a battery alarm is issued.
- 53 -
B-63943EN/03
Replacing the battery

1 2 Obtain a new lithium battery (A02B-0200-K102). After power has been supplied for at least five seconds, turn off the power to PANEL i. Remove the intelligent terminal from the panel so that replacement work can be done from the rear of the intelligent terminal. Detach the connector of the lithium battery, and remove the battery from the battery holder. Attach the connector, and place the battery in the battery holder. Install PANEL i again. Turn on the power, and check that the BIOS data are maintained (no error message is output at start-up).
3 4 5 6
NOTE Between removing an old battery and inserting new battery, no more than five minutes must be allowed to elapse.
The BIOS data is usually preserved as long as the battery is replaced according to the above procedure. If the data is lost, the following error message is displayed when the power is turned on: 251 : System CMOS checksum bad Default configuration used. At this time, check whether the current BIOS settings of the PANEL i have been changed from the default BIOS settings, and resume your settings as required.
Connector BAT1
Lithium battery A02B-0200-K102
Fig. 4.4.2 Connecting the lithium battery of a PANEL i
4.4.3
Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC)
(1) When the voltage of the battery for absolute pulse coders becomes low, DS alarms 306 to 308 occur. (2) When DS alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) occurs, replace the battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks, however, this depends on the number of pulse coders used. (3) If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, DS alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) occurs. In this case, the current positions for the pulse coders can no longer be maintained.
- 54 -
B-63943EN/03
In this state, DS alarm 300 (reference position return request alarm) occurs. Return the tool to the reference position after replacing the battery. (4) The service life of the batteries is about two years if they are used in a six-axis configuration with i/is/is series servo motors and one year if they are used in a six-axis configuration with / series servo motors. FANUC recommends that you replace the batteries periodically according to the battery service life. (5) To connect the battery, use the battery case or incorporate the battery into the servo amplifier. Note that the attachment method of the battery depends on the connection method and the type of servo amplifier.
Replacing batteries
To prevent absolute position information in absolute pulse coders from being lost, turn on the machine power before replacing the battery. The replacement procedure is described below. (Note: The turning-on step is not required when the i or is series servo motor or is series servo motor (0.4is to 22is) is used.) (1) Turn the servo amplifier on. (2) Place the machine in the emergency stop state. (3) Confirm that servo motors are not active. (4) Make sure the DC link charge LED is off. (5) Remove the old battery and then attach a new one. (6) Now, replacement has been completed. The system power can be turned off.
NOTE The absolute pulse coder of the i/is/is (0.4is to 22is) series servo motor is incorporated with a backup capacitor as standard. This backup capacitor enables an absolute position detection to be continued for about 10 minutes. Therefore, no zero point return need be performed if the time during which servo amplifier power is kept off for battery replacement is within 10 minutes. If battery replacement takes 10 minutes or more, the power must remain turned on. CAUTION 1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch bare metal parts in the panel. In particular, be careful not to touch any high-voltage circuits due to the electric shock hazard. 2 Before replacing the battery, make sure the DC link charge LED is off. Otherwise, an electric shock may be received. 3 Be sure to use the specified battery. If another type of battery is used, it may overheat, blow out, or catch fire. 4 Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position information in absolute pulse coders may be lost. 5 During attachment of the battery, insert the factory-attached protection socket into the CX5X or CX5Y connector, whichever is not used. If the +6 V pin and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position information in absolute pulse coders may be lost.
Replacing D-size alkaline dry cells in the battery case

Replace four D-size alkaline batteries (A06B-6050-K061) in the battery case installed in the machine. (1) Have four D-size alkaline batteries on hand. (2) Loosen the screws on the battery case. Remove the cover. (3) Replace the alkaline batteries in the case. Pay careful attention to the polarity of the alkaline batteries.
- 55 -

(4) Attach the cover.
Screws
B-63943EN/03
Cover
CAUTION Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position information in absolute pulse coders may be lost.
4.4.4
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC)
The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installed in the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the battery, refer to the following manuals: FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series Maintenance Manual FANUC SERVO MOTOR series Maintenance Manual FANUC SERVO MOTOR series (I/O Link option) Maintenance Manual
- 56 -
B-63943EN/03
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
5
5.1
5.1.1
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT (LCD-MOUNTED TYPE 30i SERIES)
Overview
Since the controller and display unit of the LCD-mounted type 30i series are connected internally, they do not need to be connected externally. Therefore, this section describes how to connect between the controller and the MDI unit.
5.1.2
Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD-mounted Type 30i Series)
Unit rear panel
CA55
CK27 MDI cable
MDI unit
- 57 -
B-63943EN/03
5.1.3
Connection with the Standard MDI Unit

CK27
CK27
, Maximum cable length : 20m)
NOTE For MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side, a simple lock mechanism is employed. Ensure that a load greater than 1 kg is not applied to the connectors. Moreover, clamp the cable so that excessive force is not applied due to vibration. However, shielding and clamping are not required for a cable of up to 50 cm.
- 58 -
B-63943EN/03
5.1.4
-
Key Layout of MDI
For Lathe (T series)

Standard MDI unit (ONG keys)
Help key Reset key Address/numeric keys
Edit keys
Cancel (CAN) key Case shift key Shift key AUX key CTRL key Input key
ALT key TAB key
Page change keys
Cursor keys
Function keys
Small MDI unit (OGN keys)

Address keys/Numeric keys
Cancel (CAN) key Input key Function keys Shift key
Help key Page change keys Reset key
Edit keys
Cursor keys
- 59 -
B-63943EN/03
For Machining center (M series)

Standard MDI unit (ONG keys)
Help key Reset key Address/numeric keys
Edit keys
Cancel (CAN) key Case shift key Shift key AUX key CTRL key Input key
ALT key TAB key
Page change keys
Cursor keys
Function keys
Small MDI unit (OGN keys)

Address/numeric keys
Cancel (CAN) key Input key Function keys Shift key
Help key Page change keys Reset key
Edit keys
Cursor keys
- 60 -
B-63943EN/03
Common to lathe system / machining center system

Standard MDI unit (QWERTY keys)
Help key Function keys
Reset key
Address keys Numeric keys Case shift key AUX key CTRL key Shift key ALT key TAB key Input key
Page change keys
Cursor keys
Edit keys
Cancel (CAN) key
5.2
5.2.1
CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT (STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES)

Overview
This subsection explains connection with the display/MDI units for the stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i. For the stand-alone type Series 300i/310i/320i, see Chapter 13. For the stand-alone type Series 300is/310is/320is, see Chapter 11.
- 61 -
B-63943EN/03
5.2.2
Connection with an LCD Unit
Control unit Optical fiber cable COP21A External power supply 24VDC 10%
LCD unit COP21A
CP1A
CP1B
CA55
MDI unit CK27
Connection of a power supply to the LCD unit

An optical fiber cable is used to make the connection between the CNC control unit and LCD unit. For details of the optical fiber cable, see Appendix D. Supply the power to the LCD unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
- 62 -
B-63943EN/03 Display unit CP1A 1 2 3 +24V 0V

External power
24VDC stabilized power 24VDC 10%
Cable CP1A Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3 (housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) +24V (1) 0V (2)
External power Select a source that meets the external power terminal.
Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830(5m) (Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)
Part of the 24 VDC power input to CP1A can be taken out from CP1B by branching. CP1B connection is as shown below. In this case, the rating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CP1A must be the sum of the power consumed within the LCD unit and that supplied to external equipment via CP1B. Up to 1.0 A can be supplied to the external equipment.
LCD unit CP1B 1 2 3 +24V 0V External device
Cable
CP1B AMP Japan 2-178288-3 (Housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) +24V (1) 0V (2)
External device Select a connector that matches the pin layout of the external device.
Connection between the LCD unit and MDI unit

For the connection between the connector (CA55) of the LCD unit and that (CK1) of the MDI unit, see Subsection 5.1.3, Connection with the Standard MDI Unit. With the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i, the connector (CA55) is located on the CNC control unit on the back of the LCD. With the stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i, the connector is located on the back of the LCD unit.
- 63 -
B-63943EN/03
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
With Two Display Units Each connection

External power supply 24VDC10% External power supply 24VDC10% 1st display unit
CP1A CP1B CA55 DISPLAY (COP21A)
Optical fiber cable
Stand-alone type control unit 24V-IN (CPD19A)
MDI unit
MDI cable
CK27
COP21B JA73 CA103 Video cable between units
24-V power cable
External power supply 24VDC10%
MDI cable between units
CA103 JA73
MDI unit
CP1A CP1B CA55 MDI cable
CK27
2nddisplay unit
Connection to the control unit, between display units, and to the power supply
An optical fiber cable is used to make the connection between the control unit and 1st display unit. Video and MDI cables between units are used to make the connection between the 1st and 2nd display units. For details of the optical fiber cable, see Appendix D. Connect cables between units as follows. The maximum length of a cable between the 1st and 2nd display units is 30 m.
- 64 -
B-63943EN/03
Connection of the MDI cable between units

1st display unit JA73 PCR-E20MDA 1 *KEY00 2 *KEY02 3 *KEY04 4 *KEY06 5 *COM00 6 *COM02 7 *COM04 8 *COM06 9 *COM08 10 *COM10 2nd display unit JA73 PCR-E20MDA 1 *KEY00 2 *KEY02 3 *KEY04 4 *KEY06 5 *COM00 6 *COM02 7 *COM04 8 *COM06 9 *COM08 10 *COM10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
*KEY01 *KEY03 *KEY05 *KEY07 *COM01 *COM03 *COM05 *COM07 *COM09 *COM11
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
*KEY01 *KEY03 *KEY05 *KEY07 *COM01 *COM03 *COM05 *COM07 *COM09 *COM11
Cable *KEY00 *KEY02 *KEY04 *KEY06 *COM00 *COM02 *COM04 *COM06 *COM08 *COM10 *KEY01 *KEY03 *KEY05 *KEY07 *COM01 *COM03 *COM05 *COM07 *COM09 *COM11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Shield Ground the shield of the cable near each display unit. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *KEY00 *KEY02 *KEY04 *KEY06 *COM00 *COM02 *COM04 *COM06 *COM08 *COM10 *KEY01 *KEY03 *KEY05 *KEY07 *COM01 *COM03 *COM05 *COM07 *COM09 *COM11
Ground plate
Ground plate
Recommended cable: A02B-0323-K865 (50m) A02B-0303-K848 (30m) A02B-0303-K845 (20m) A02B-0303-K846 (10m) A02B-0303-K847 (5m) Recommended cableside connectors (JA73) PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) Recommended wire specification A66L-0001-0284#10P(#28AWG 10 pairs, maximum cable length: 50m)
- 65 -

Connection of the video cable between units
B-63943EN/03
If a severe noise environment is expected or the length of the video cable between units is longer than 30 m, be sure to mount a ferrite core (A02B-0323-K869) between the 2nd display unit and ground plate on the 2nd display unit.
1st display unit CA103 DV2R024N11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DVI2M DVI2P 0V *BLOFFP *BLOFFM 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DVI1M DVI1P 0V *RGBENM *RGBENP 0V 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DVI0M DVI0P 0V
2nd display unit CA103 DV2R024N11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DVI2M DVI2P 0V *BLOFFP *BLOFFM 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DVI1M DVI1P 0V *RGBENM *RGBENP 0V 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DVI0M DVI0P 0V
0V
0V DVICK1P DVICK1M
0V
0V DVICK1P DVICK1M
Cable DVI2M DVI2P 0V DVI1M DVI1P 0V DVI0M DVI0P 0V DVICKP DVICKM 0V *BLOFFP *BLOFFM *RGBENM *RGBENP 0V 0V (Connector frame)
1 2 3 9 10 11 17 18 19 23 24 22 4 5 12 13 15 8 Shield
1 2 3 9 10 11 17 18 19 23 24 22 4 5 12 13 15 8
DVI2M DVI2P 0V DVI1M DVI1P 0V DVI0M DVI0P 0V DVICKP DVICKM 0V *BLOFFP *BLOFFM *RGBENM *RGBENP 0V 0V (Connector frame)
Ground plate Recommended cable: A02B-0323-K860 (50m) A02B-0303-K843 (30m) A02B-0303-K840 (20m) A02B-0303-K841 (10m) A02B-0303-K842 (5m) Recommended cableside connectors (CA103) DV2P024M11 (connector)(Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) D045-51839 (housing)(Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) Recommended wire specification A66L-0001-0511 (Maximum cable length: 50m)
Ground plate Ground the shield of the cable near each display unit.
When connecting the video cable between units to each display unit, fix the cable with the cable support plate attached with the unit.
- 66 -
B-63943EN/03

Display unit CP1A(X) 1 2 3 +24V 0V GND Cable CP1A(X) Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3 (housing) 1-175218-5 (contact) +24V (1) 0V (2) 24VDC stabilized power 24VDC 10% 24VDC power supply
Supply the power to the display unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
Use a terminal available with the 24 VDC power supply. 24VDC power supply +24V
0V FG Make a jumper between 0 V and FG to connect ground. Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830(5m) (Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the 24VDC power supply side)
To share a power supply between the 1st and 2nd display units, see the figure below.
1st display unit CP1B (Y) 1 2 3 Cable CP1B (Y) Tyco Electronics 2-178288-3 (housing) 1-175218-5 (contact) +24V (1) 0V(2) CP1A (X) Tyco Electronics 1-178288-3 (housing) 1-175218-5 (contact) +24V (1) 0V(2) +24V 0V 2nd display unit CP1A (X) 1 2 3 +24V 0V
NOTE For power-on and -off timing, see Section 4.2, TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT. Make connection so that 24 VDC 10% power is also supplied to the 2nd display unit in the same way as for the 1st display unit.
Connection to the MDI unit

For the connection between the connector (CA55) on the display unit and that (CK27) on the MDI unit, see Section 5.1, Connection between the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit and MDI Unit. With the LCD-mounted type control unit, the connector (CA55) is located on the back of the control unit. With the stand-alone type control unit, the connector is located on the back of the display unit.
NOTE Be sure to use two MDI units of the same type when required.
- 67 -
B-63943EN/03
5.2.3.2
Installing the display unit

60mm
Note)
50mm
50mm
NOTE 100 mm (max) when the connector of the MDI cable between units is spring-fixed or 60 mm (max) when it is screw-fixed.
5.3
5.3.1
CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

Overview
An input/output device is used to enter information such as CNC programs and parameters from an external device to the CNC, or to output information from the CNC to an external device. The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms to RS-232-C, so that a connection can be made with a device that has an RS-232-C interface. The tables below indicate the serial ports of this CNC. See Chapter 13, when an PANEL i is used. (For Series 30i/31i/32i control unit)
Port name First channel (JD56A) Second channel (JD36A) Main control unit Main control unit Interface location Note 1
(For 15 LCD-mounted type control unit)

Port name First channel (JD56A) Second channel (JD54A) Main control unit Main control unit Interface location Note 1
(For PANEL i)
Port name First channel on the PANEL i side (JD33) Second channel on the PANEL i side (JD46) Interface location On the PANEL i On the PANEL i Note 2
- 68 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch panel communication on the CNC side, so that this port cannot be used as a general-purpose port. 2 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch panel communication on the PC side, so that this port cannot be used as a general-purpose port.
5.3.2
Connecting I/O Devices
Unit rear panel
R232-1 JD56A
R232-2 JD36A
Punch panel
NOTE This interface is the RS-232C interface on the CNC side. When using the PANEL i, usually use the RS-232C interface on the personal computer for parameter I/Os, program I/Os, and other similar operations. This RS-232C interface on the CNC side can be used on the 300i/310i/320i only for the following purposes: Ladder uploading or downloading via RS-232-C using FANUC LADDER or FANUC LADDER II Ladder monitoring from an external PC using FANUC LADDER II DNC operation via RS-232-C, external I/O device control Input/output of parameters and programs by using the CNC screen display function
- 69 -
B-63943EN/03
5.3.3
RS-232-C Serial Port

CNC JD36A, JD56A, JD54 PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (PCR-EV20MDT) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RD 0V DR 0V CS 0V CD 0V (*) +24V 11 SD 12 0V 13 ER 14 0V 15 RS 16 0V 17 (*) 18 (+5V)(*) 19 +24V 20 (+5V)(*) RELAY CONNECTOR (DBM-25S) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
>
>
<
ER
+24V
NOTE 1 +24 V can be used as the power supply for FANUC RS-232-C equipment. 2 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal names are not indicated. 3 Pins 18 and 20 (+5V) are provided for touch channel connection. 4 The upper connector name on the CNC side is for the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector name, enclosed in parentheses, is for the stand-alone type. 5 With JD56A, the pins marked with an asterisk (*) are used for a serial spindle.
- 70 -
B-63943EN/03
For LCD-mounted type
For stand-alone type
NOTE 1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal names are not indicated. 2 The recommended cable connector FI30-20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for connectors JD5A and JD5B of the stand-alone type.
- 71 -
B-63943EN/03
5.3.4
RS-232-C Interface Specification
RS-232-C Interface signals

Generally signals as follows are used in RS-232-C interface.
CNC Output Input
SD (Send data) RD (Receive data) RS (Request to Send) CS (Enable to send) When CS is not used short CS and RS.
ER (Ready) DR (Data set ready) CD (Check data) SG (Signal ground)
When DR is not used short DR and ER.
Always short ER and CD.
FG (Frame ground)
Fig. 5.3.4 (a) RS-232-C interface
Signal description of RS-232-C interface

Signal name SD RD RS-232C circuit number 103 104 I/O Output Input Sending data Receiving data Description
Start bit Stop bits
(When ISO code 0 is sent)
RS CS
105 106
Output Input
Sending request Sending permitted
This signal is set to on when NC starts sending data and is turned off when transmission ends. When both this signal and the DR signal are set, the NC can send data. If external device processing is delayed by a punching operation, etc., NC data sending can be stopped by turning off this signal after sending two characters, including the data being sent currently. If this signal will not be used, make sure to strap this signal circuit to the RS signal circuit.
- 72 -
B-63943EN/03

RS-232C circuit number 107 I/O Input Data set ready Description When external device is ready to operate, this signal is set. This signal should usually be connected to the signal indicating external device power supply being on. (ER signal of external device). See Note below. The NC transfers data when this signal is set. If the signals turned off during data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the DR signal will not be used, make sure to strap this signal circuit to the ER signal circuit. This signal is set when the NC is ready to operate. External device should regard the SD signal as being significant when the ER signal is set. Since this signal is not used in connections with external device, the signal circuit must be strapped, inside the connecting cable, to the ER signal circuit.
Signal name DR
ER
108.2
Output
NC ready to operation Signal Condition Signal grounding Frame grounding
CD
109
Input
SG FG
102 101
NOTE Signal on/off state is defined as follows;

-3V or lower Function Signal Condition OFF Marking +3V or higher ON Spacing
Transmission Method of RS-232-C interface

Start-stop
Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface. This CNC use the start-stop method. With this method, start and stop signals are output before and after each data bit.
One character in start-stop
b1 Start bit
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8 Stop bits (2 bits)
Data bit (8 bit including one parity bit)
Codes
Transmission codes are as follows: (i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4. (ii) ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input is necessary.) The connected external device must be able to recognize the following control codes, sent from NC.
Control code DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Tape reader start Tape punch designation Tape reader stop Tape punch release 8 7 6 5 4

NOTE The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
- 73 -
B-63943EN/03
In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used. (a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4. (b) When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals (When NC issues data) (i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by using the NC's CS signal. Data output stops within two characters including a currently transmitting character when CS OFF signal is input to NC. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission start. (ii) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sending data again. (c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the external device must satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.3.4.
Table 5.3.4
Character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z DEL NUL BS HT LF or NL CR SP % ( ) + : / . # $ & 8 ISO code 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Del Blank BS Tab CR or EOB SP ER ( 2-4-5 ) ( 2-4-7 ) + / . 8 7 EIA code 6 5 4 Meaning 3 2 1 ? ? ? ? ? Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral Numeral Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
? ?
&
- 74 -
B-63943EN/03
ISO code 6 5

8 7 4 3 2 1 Character , 8 7 EIA code 6 5 4 Meaning 3 2 1
Character , ; < = > ? @
NOTE 1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the following items must be noted in Table 5.3.4 (a).
Control out (Comment field start) Control in (Comment field end) EIA code (....................) CR o .. ..................
Condition 1
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
ISO code
(.....................)
LF
....................
Condition1 Left parenthesis "("of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5 when used in the EIA code. Right parenthesis ")"of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7 when used in the EIA code. Condition2 EIA code CR is LF in ISO code. Condition3 EIA code O is : in ISO code. 2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output from the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NC tape.
(3) Transmission rate (Baud rate) The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred per second. The following baud rates are available depending on the system parameter. 50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 [Example] Baud rate : 110 When using one start bit and two stop bits (totalling 11 bits per character): Transmission characters/second= 110/11 =10 characters/second (Max.) (4) Cable length The cable length depends on the external device type. Consult with the device manufacturers for actual connecting cable lengths. Cable length is as follows by the specification of NC. for RS-232C 100m or less 4800 bauds or less 50m or less 9600 bauds or less
Time chart when the NC receives data (Read into memory)

(1) NC outputs DC1. (2) The I/O device starts sending data upon receiving DC1. (3) NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
- 75 -
B-63943EN/03
(4) The I/O device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3. The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If it sends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur. (5) NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing. (6) The I/O device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code (the data must be the next data to the preceding.) (7) NC sends DC3 upon completing data read. (8) The I/O device stops sending data.
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
ER (output) RS (output) DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3 ER code
SD (output) RD (input) DR (input) CS (input) Up to 10 characters 1ms or longer
Time chart when the NC send data (Punch out)

(1) NC output DC2. (2) NC outputs punch data in succession. (3) When data processing is delayed at the I/O device. (a) Data output stops within two characters including a currently transmitting character when CS signal is turned off. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (b)) (b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sending data again. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (c)) (4) The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on after the I/O device completes data processing. (5) The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.
ER (output) RS (output)
DC2
DC4
SD (output) RD (input) CS (input)
1ms or longer
Within 2 characters
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
- 76 -
B-63943EN/03

ER (output) RS (output)
DC2
DC4
SD (output) DC3 RD (input) Within 2 characters DR (input) CS (input) 1ms or longer DC1
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
Connection between RS-232-C interface and external device

CNC side SD SD I/O device side
RD RS CS ER DR
RD RS CS ER DR
CD SG FG
CD SG FG
- 77 -
B-63943EN/03
Use the connection shown in the figure below when the ER and DR signals are not used for handshaking.
CNC side SD SD I/O device side
RD RS
RD RS
CS ER DR CD SG FG
CS ER DR CD SG FG
he cable for connecting the I/O device to the CNC should be connected as shown in the below diagram.
Serial interface SD RD RS CS SG ER DR
Cable : twist 10 pairs 0.18mm2, with shield
- 78 -
B-63943EN/03
5.4
5.4.1
CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)

Connecting the High-speed Skip (HDI)
CNC JA40 PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (RCR-EV20MDT) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 HDI0 0V HDI2 0V 0V HDI4 <> <> <> 0V 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 HDI1 0V HDI3 0V HDI5 0V HDI6 0V HDI7 0V
NOTE 1 The upper connector specification of JA40 is for the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector specification, enclosed in parentheses, is for the stand-alone type. 2 No connections must be made to the pins with angle brackets (<>) because they are reserved for expansions.
- 79 -
B-63943EN/03
Cable connections
JA40 HDI0 0V HDI1 0V HDI2 0V HDI3 0V HDI4 0V HDI5 0V HDI6 0V HDI7 0V 1 2 11 12 3 4 13 14 6 5 or 10 15 16 17 18 19 20 7 8 9 10 Shield Ground plate Recommended cable connector: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex Japan)
NOTE The recommended cable connector FI30-20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the stand-alone type.
5.4.2
Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI)
Circuit configuration
CNC DRIVER IiL/IiH

FILTER
RECEIVER
VH/VL SHIELD
- 80 -
B-63943EN/03
Absolute maximum rating Input voltage range Vin: -3.6 to +13.6 V Input characteristics
Unit High level input voltage Low level input voltage High level input current Low level input current Input signal pulse duration Input signal delay or variations Symbol VH VL IiH IiL Specification 3.6 to 11.6 0 to 1.0 2 (max) 11 (max) -8.0 (max) 20 (min) 0.02 (max) Unit V V mA mA mA s ms Remark
Vin=5V Vin=10V Vin=0V
NOTE 1 The plus (+) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow into the receiver. The minus (-) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow out of the receiver. 2 The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input voltage is at the low level and 0 when it is at the high level. 3 The input level for the CNC receiver is high when the circuit is open. So, the input level for the external driver must be low.
5.5
Linking The EMBEDDED Ethernet Interface

CAUTION Before attaching or removing cables, power off the CNC main unit, and confirm that the power is off. Ask the respective manufacturers for explanations about how to build a network and about conditions for using units (such as a media converter, hub, transceiver, and cable) other than the CNC unit. When installing network cables, exercise sufficient caution so that the network will not be affected by any noise source. Electrically separate the network wiring sufficiently from noise sources like motors and their power lines. Also, ground each unit as required. If the grounding impedance is high, it may cause trouble in communication. Once the equipment is installed, conduct communication tests to verify normal operation before starting actual use of the equipment. FANUC is not liable to any damage related to trouble arising from any unit other than the CNC unit.
5.5.1
Connection to the Ethernet Interface
The 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX interfaces are available. A hub (line concentrator) is used to connect the CNC unit to a system. A typical connection example is shown below.
- 81 -
B-63943EN/03
CNC unit
Twisted-pair cable
Max. 100m Shield
HUB (line concentrator)
Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not dust-proof. Using them in an atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet.
Leading in Ethernet cables

An Ethernet cable should be fixed with a clamp or the like so that pulling it will not cause tension to be applied to the connector (RJ-45) at the end of the cable. The clamp not only fixes the cable but also grounds the shield of the cable.
Control unit
Ethernet cable
Clamp
Grounding plate
Pin arrangement of the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector (CD38A)

CD38A
Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal name TX+ TXRX+ Description Transmit + Transmit Receive + Not used Not used Receive Not used Not used
RX-
- 82 -
B-63943EN/03
5.5.2
Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable
Cable connection
The connectors of a cable for connecting between the 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX interface (CD38A) and the hub have the pin arrangement shown below.
CD38A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Max. 100m RXTX+ TXRX+ RJ-45 modular jack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HUB TX+ TXRX+
RX-
CD38A TX+ TXRX+ RX1 2 3 6 1 2 3 6 TX+ TXRX+ RX-
Shield
NOTE The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
Cable Wires
Many cables without a shield (UTP cables) are commercially available as twisted pair cables conforming to 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX. To improve noise immunity in factory automation environments, however, be sure to use twisted pair cables (STP cables) with a common shield in category 5. Recommended cables (for fixed parts)
Manufacturer Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. Nissei Electric Co., Ltd. Specification DTS5087C-4P F-4PFWMF Remark Twisted wires Single-wire cable
NOTE No cable recommended for use in fixed sections shall be used in movable sections. Be sure to use the following movable-section cables.
- 83 -

Recommended cable (for movable sections)
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Specification AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB)
B-63943EN/03
Remark Dedicated to FANUC products
Cable specification (FANUC original product, with no connector) Drawing number: A66L-0001-0453 Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Specification Electrical characteristic: Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5 The length of the cable to the hub must be kept within 50 m because of its attenuation performance. Structure: Common-shield braided cable with drain wire The conductors of the cable are AWG26 annealed-copper strand wire, with a sheath 0.8 mm thick and an outer diameter of 6.7 0.3 mm Fire resistance: UL1581 VW-1 Oil resistance: As per FANUC's internal standard (Equivalent to conventional oil-resistant electrical cable) Flex resistance: Million or more bending cycles with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped bend test) UL style No.: AWM20276 (80C/30V/VW-1)
NOTE Use the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. to this cable.
About cable assemblies Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can offer a cable assembly that uses the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. To get this cable assembly, negotiate directly with the manufacturer on its specifications (cable length, shipping test, package, etc.).
Connector specification
An 8-pin modular connector called the RJ-45 is used with a twisted-pair cable for Ethernet interfaces. Use the connector listed below or equivalent.
Specification Connector used with cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) TM21CP-88P(03) Manufacturer Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Remark (Note)
NOTE About TM21CP-88P(03) Connector (manufacturer's standard product) Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P Manufacturer: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Manufacturer's model number: TM21CP-88P(03) Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5 Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about how to attach the connector to a cable.
(Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the TM21CP-88P(03) Wiring Procedure Specification (Engineering Specification No. ATAD-E2367) to explain the related technical information.)
- 84 -
B-63943EN/03
5.5.3
Anti-Noise Measure
Separating signal lines

Ethernet cable wires belong to group C. See descriptions elsewhere for explanations about how to separate them from wires in group A or B.
Cable clamp and shield processing

If any cable led into the CNC requires shielding, clamp it as shown below. The same method is used also to shield Ethernet twisted-pair cables. The clamp shown in the figure works not only for cable fixing but also for shield processing. Shield processing is very important to maintain the stable operation of the system. Do not forget attach this clamp. See Subsection 3.5.5, "Cable Clamp and Shield Processing," for details.
5.5.4
Network Installation
Even when the machine satisfies its grounding requirements, noise from the machine may get on communication lines depending on the way the machine is installed and its environment, resulting in a communication error. Separating and isolating the Ethernet backbone cable and PC from the machine can prevent noise from getting on the communication lines. An example of connection is shown below.
- 85 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from the machine system. If this is impossible because there is only one grounding point, use separate grounding wires for the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up to the grounding point. The grounding resistance must not be higher than 100 (class 3 grounding). The grounding wire must not be thinner than the AC power line conductor, and its cross-sectional area must not smaller than 5.5 mm2. 2 In some cases, the aforementioned isolation/separation method based on 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cannot assure normal communication because of influence by noise. In such worst environments, use optical fiber media to completely isolate the machine from the PC.
- 86 -
B-63943EN/03
6.SPINDLE CONNECTION
SPINDLE CONNECTION
The figure below shows the spindle-related connections. Note that the number of connectable spindles depends on the configuration. So, see Section 6.1.
With a Series 30i, eight serial spindles can be connected in total: six on the main board and two on the additional spindle board.
- 87 -
B-63943EN/03
6.1
6.1.1
SERIAL SPINDLE
Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles
CNC JA41 (main board) PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (PCR-EV20MDT) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SIN *SIN SOUT *SOUT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] (+5V) [ ] 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0V 0V [ ] 0V [ ] (+5V) [ ] (+5V) JA7B PCR-EV20MDT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SIN *SIN SOUT *SOUT 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V (+5V) (+5V) Spindle amplifier module
(+5V)
NOTE 1 When an optical cable is used for connection between the NC and a spindle amplifier, the +5V signals indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to the optical adapter. Do not connect these signals when an optical cable is not used. The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used when three or four serial spindles are used. 2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand-alone type. 3 The second serial spindle is connected as a branch from the spindle amplifier module.
Cable connection Connector JA41 SOUT *SOUT CNC 3 4 Connector JA7B 1 SIN 2 *SIN 3 SOUT 4 12,14,16 *SOUT 0V Spindle amplifier module
SIN 1 *SIN 0V 2 12,14,16
Ground plate
Ground plate
Recommended cable connector: PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan) Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
- 88 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 In any of the following cases, make a connection via an optical fiber cable by using an optical adapter: When the cable is 20 m or longer When the power magnetics cabinet containing a spindle amplifier cannot be connected with the operator's panel cabinet containing a CNC control unit via a ground wire with a cross-sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more When the cable is subject to significant noise. For example, when there is a strong electromagnetic noise source such as a welding machine near the cable, or when the cable runs in parallel with a power line or power magnetics cable that can generate noise. 2 The conventional optical I/O link adapter (A13B-0154-B001) cannot be used. Use an optical adapter (A13B-0154-B003).
Outline drawing of an optical adapter
66 40 Connector for connecting a unit JD1 4-M3 Optical connector COP1
45
FANUC
Ground plate
Unit: mm
Connection diagram (Connection diagram when only electrical cables are used)
CNC SPM JA7B JA41 JA7A JA7A SPM JA7B
Interconnection cable 2
- 89 -
18
(Connection diagram when optical cables are used)
CNC JD1 JA41 COP1 Optical adapter
B-63943EN/03
Optical cable Interconnection cable 4
SPM JD1 COP1 Optical adapter Interconnection cable 4 Interconnection cable 4 JA7B JA7A
SPM JA7B JA7A
6.1.2
Connecting Three to Four Serial Spindles
With the 30i series , three or four serial spindles can be connected using the serial spindle connector panel described below. Serial spindle connector panel specification: A13B-0180-B001 Outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel The outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel are the same as those for the optical adapter (A13B-0154-B003).
45
Connector for connection with a spindle amplifier JA7A-2 (second channel) 66 40
Connector for connection with a spindle amplifier JA7A-1 (first channel)
Connector for connection with the CNC JA48 4-M3 7
Conditions for installing the serial spindle connector panel The serial spindle connector panel does not have an enclosed structure. So, install the serial spindle connector panel in an enclosed cabinet as used for the CNC. Ground the case by using the case mounting screws of the serial spindle connector panel. The serial spindle connector panel is light, so that it need not be secured with screws. However, ensure that the serial spindle connector panel does not contact other electrical circuits and thus cause a short circuit. When securing the serial spindle connector panel to the cabinet, for example, attach an L-shaped metal fitting as shown below with a case mounting screw (M3) of the serial spindle connector panel.
- 90 -
18
B-63943EN/03
L-shaped metal fitti
Connection diagram (Connection diagram when only electrical cables are used)
Serial spindle connector panel SPM CNC JA7A-1 JA48 JA7B JA7A-2 JA7A SPM Interconnection cable 2 Interconnection cable 2 JA7B JA7A SPM JA7B JA7A JA41 SPM JA7B JA7A
(Connection diagram when optical cables are used)

Serial spindle connector panel SPM
CNC
JA7A-1 JA48
JD1 COP1 Optical adapter JD1
JA41
JA7A-2
COP1
Interconnection cable 3 Interconnection cable 4
Optical cable
SPM JD1 COP1 Optical adapter JD1 COP1 JA7B JA7A SPM Interconnection cable 4 Interconnection cable 2 JA7B JA7A
SPM JA7B JA7A JA7B JA7A SPM
- 91 -
(Cable connections when only electrical cables are used) Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel (Interconnection cable 1)
CNC JA41 (main board) PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (PCR-E20VMDT) SINA 11 2 *SINA 12 3 SOUTA 13 4 *SOUTA 14 5 <> 15 6 <> 16 7 8 <> <> 17 18 0V 0V SINB 0V *SINB (+5V) JA48 PCR-E20MDT 2 SINA *SINA 11 12 0V Serial spindle connector panel
B-63943EN/03
3 SOUTA 13 4 *SOUTA 14 0V 5 15 SOUTB 6 7 8 9 10 (+5V) *SINB 16 0V 17 *SOUTB 18 (+5V) 19 20 SINB (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 SOUTB 10 *SOUTB 20 (+5V)
NOTE 1 When an optical cable is used for the connection between the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to the optical adapter. No connections must be made to the pins with angle brackets (< >) because they are reserved for expansions. 2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand-alone type. 3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected as branches from the spindle amplifier module.
Cable connection JA41 SINA *SINA SOUTA *SOUTA SINB *SINB SOUTB *SOUTB 0V 0V 0V 1 2 3 4 15 17 19 10 12 14 16 Shield Ground plate 3 4 1 2 15 17 19 10 12 14 16 SOUTA *SOUTA SINA *SINA SOUTB *SOUTB SINB *SINB 0V 0V 0V JA48
Recommended cable connector: PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan) Recommended cable specification: A02B-0236-K845 Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
- 92 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a power line, a shielded wire must be connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is installed close to the serial spindle connector panel, however, no connection to the ground plate is necessary.
Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and a spindle amplifier (Interconnection cable 2)
NOTE When an optical cable is used for the connection between the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to the optical adapter. Do not connect these signals when an optical cable is not used.
Cable connection JA7A-1, 2 SIN *SIN SOUT *SOUT 0V 0V 0V 1 2 3 4 12 14 16 Ground plate Shield Ground plate 3 4 1 2 12 14 16 SOUT *SOUT SIN *SIN 0V 0V 0V JA7B
Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
NOTE When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a power line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to the ground plate. When the serial spindle connector panel is installed close to the spindle amplifier module, a connection to the ground plate is unnecessary.
(Cable connections when optical cables are used) Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel (Interconnection cable 3)
- 93 -
CNC JA41 (main board) PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (PCR-EV20MDT) SINA 11 2 *SINA 12 3 SOUTA 13 4 *SOUTA 14 5 <> 15 6 <> 16 7 8 <> <> 17 18 0V 0V SINB 0V *SINB (+5V) JA48 PCR-E20MDT 2 SINA *SINA 11 12 0V Serial spindle connector panel
B-63943EN/03
3 SOUTA 13 4 *SOUTA 14 0V 5 15 SOUTB 6 7 8 9 10 (+5V) *SINB 16 0V 17 *SOUTB 18 (+5V) 19 20 SINB (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 SOUTB 10 *SOUTB 20 (+5V)
NOTE 1 No connections must be made to the pins with angle brackets (< >) because they are reserved for expansions. 2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand-alone type. 3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected as branches from the spindle amplifier module.
Cable connection JA41 SINA *SINA SOUTA *SOUTA SINB *SINB SOUTB *SOUTB +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 0V 1 2 3 4 15 17 19 10 9 18 20 12 14 16 Shield Ground plate 3 4 1 2 15 17 19 10 9 18 20 12 14 16 SOUTA *SOUTA SINA *SINA SOUTB *SOUTB SINB *SINB +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 0V JA48
Recommended cable connector: PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan) Recommended cable specification: A02B-0236-K847 Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
- 94 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a power line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is installed close to the serial spindle connector panel, however, a connection to the ground plate is unnecessary.
Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and optical adapter and between the spindle amplifier and optical adapter (Interconnection cable 4)
Serial spindle connector panel or spindle amplifier JA7A-1,2(PCR-E20MD) JA7B(PCR-EV20MDT) 1 SIN 11 2 *SIN 12 0V 3 SOUT 13 4 *SOUT 14 0V 15 5 16 0V 6 17 7 18 +5V 8 9 +5V 19 20 +5V 10 Optical adapter JD1 (PCR-E20LMDT) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SIN 11 *SIN 12 SOUT 13 *SOUT 14 15 16 17 18 +5V 19 20 0V 0V 0V +5V +5V
Cable connection JA7A-1, 2 JA7B JD1 1 2 3 4 9 18 20 12 14 16 3 4 1 2 9 18 20 12 14 16 SOUT *SOUT SIN *SIN +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 0V
SIN *SIN SOUT *SOUT +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 0V
Shield Ground plate
Recommended cable connector: PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan) Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)
Interconnection cable 3 can be used alternatively.
- 95 -
B-63943EN/03
6.1.3
Connecting Five or Six Serial Spindles

CNC JD56A (main board) PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (PCR-EV20MDT) [ ] 11 [ ] 2 0V 12 0V 3 [ ] 13 [ ] 4 0V 14 0V 5 [ ] 15 [ ] 6 0V 16 0V 7 [ ] 17 SOUTA 8 0V 18 *SOUTA 9 SINA 19 [ ] 10 [ ] 20 *SINA Spindle amplifier module JA7B PCR-EV20MDT SIN 11 2 *SIN 12 3 SOUT 13 4 *SOUT 14 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 9 (+5V) 19 10 20 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V (+5V) (+5V)
NOTE 1 The optical adapter cannot be used for this connection. 2 The pins in brackets ([ ]) are used when a RS-232C device is used. 3 The upper connector specification of JA56A is used with the LCD-mounted type. The lower connector specification (in parentheses) is used with the stand-alone type.
Cable connection JD56A SOUTA *SOUTA SINA *SINA 0V 0V 0V 17 18 9 20 12 14 16 Shield Ground plate Recommended cable connector: PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan) Recommended cable specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs) 1 2 3 4 12 14 16 JA7B SIN *SIN SOUT *SOUT 0V 0V 0V
NOTE When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a power line, a shielded wire must be connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is installed close to the spindle amplifier module, however, no connection to the ground plate is necessary.
- 96 -
B-63943EN/03
6.1.4
Connecting Seven or Eight Serial spindles
NOTE When an optical cable is used for the connection between the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated in parentheses are used to feed power to the optical adapter. Do not connect these signals when an optical cable is not used. No connections must be made to the pins with angle brackets (< >) because they are reserved for expansions.
Cable connection JA41L SOUTA *SOUTA SINA *SINA 0V 0V 0V 3 4 1 2 12 14 16 Shield Ground plate Recommended cable connector: PCR-E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FCN-247J020-G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan) Recommended cable specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs) 1 2 3 4 12 14 16 JA7B SIN *SIN SOUT *SOUT 0V 0V 0V
NOTE When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a power line, a shielded wire must be connected to the ground plate. When the CNC is installed close to the spindle amplifier module, however, no connection to the ground plate is necessary.
- 97 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
7
7.1
SERVO INTERFACE
CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS
Control unit
COP10A-1 COP10A-2
This figure is an example of connecting to control unit a LCD-mounted type.
- 98 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.1.1
Overview
This chapter describes how to connect the servo units to the 30i series . For details of the connection of the Servo amplifier i series, refer to the Servo Amplifier i series Descriptions (B-65282EN).
7.1.2
Interface to the Servo Amplifiers
The connections between the CNC control unit and servo amplifiers should be made using optical cables. Up to three FSSB lines can be connected to the control unit. For the first and second FSSB lines, the optical connectors are located on the servo card of the main board (some servo card types do not have an optical connector for the second FSSB line). For the third FSSB line, the optical connector is located on the additional axis board (the unit may not have an additional axis board because it is optional). The maximum number of axes and the connector name for each FSSB line depend on the type and control method of the line. See the table below.
Control method and maximum number of axes HRV2 First FSSB line Second FSSB line Third FSSB line 16 axes 8 axes 8 axes HRV3 10 axes 8 axes 10 axes HRV4 4 axes 2 axes 4 axes COP10A-1 COP10A-2 COP10A-3 On the servo card On the servo card On the additional axis board Connector name Remarks
The following table lists the maximum number of controlled axes and control methods in the 30i/31i/32i.
Control method and maximum number of axes HRV2 HRV3 HRV4 30i 31i 32i 32 axes 20 axes 9 axes 28 axes 20 axes 9 axes 10 axes 10 axes HRV4 not usable Remarks
NOTE 1 As servo amplifier modules, i series SVM (supported by the 30i/31i/32i) or i series SVM units must be used. 2 The number of axes that can be controlled varies also depending on the software series, the servo card, and the type of an additional axis board. 3 When the number of axes that was set for the first FSSB line is zero, no axes can be set for the second FSSB line. 4 Unused optical connectors must be covered with the caps.
<Cable types> Usage For internal connection For external connection Cable drawing number A02B-0236-K851 to -K856 (A66L-6001-0023# or greater) A66L-6001-0026# or greater) A66L-6001-0049# or greater) Length of 10 m or less Length of 50 m or less (between slave units) Length of 100 m or less (between slave units) Cable length
- 99 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
CNC control unit
B-63943EN/03
Additional axis board COP10A-3 3rd FSSB line 2)
Servo card COP10A-2 COP10A-1 2nd FSSB line 1st FSSB line 2)
Slave unit
Servo amplifier 2) Optical fiber cable 3) COP10B COP10A
Maximum allowable cable length 1) The total cable length on each line shall satisfy the following conditions. <Total cable length on each line> Control method Total cable length HRV2 500m HRV3 200m HRV4 150m 2) Between the CNC and 1st slave unit: - When A66L-6001-0026#~ is used: 50 m - When A66L-6001-0049#~ is used: 100 m 3) Between slave units: 40 m
COP10B COP10A
3) COP10B COP10A Separate detector interface unit COP10B COP10A
3)
- 100 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.2
SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE

Separate detector interface unit
CP11A Servo amplifier module
Control unit or the previous-stage servo amplifier module
COP10B COP10A
Digital output Linear encoder or rotary encoder
- 101 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
CNC Servo amplifier module COP10A Optical fiber cable COP10B COP10A
B-63943EN/03
Servo card
COP10B COP10A
Optical fiber cable
COP10B COP10A
Separate detector interface unit (basic) COP10B COP10A 24VDC CP11A JF101 JF102 JF103 JF104 CNF1 Flat cable JA4A Linear encoder axis 1 Linear encoder axis 2 Linear encoder axis 3 Linear encoder axis 4 Battery for absolute position detector
Separate detector interface unit (additional) CNF2 JF105 JF106 JF107 JF108 Linear encoder axis 5 Linear encoder axis 6 Linear encoder axis 7 Linear encoder axis 8
When a separate detector such as a separate rotary encoder or linear encoder is used, a separate detector interface unit is required. The separate detector interface unit is connected through an optical fiber cable as an unit on an FSSB line. A separate detector interface unit consists of basic units and additional units. Up to four pulse coders or liner scales can be connected by adding an additional unit (up to eight units can be connected as a total). An additional unit is connected to a basic unit through a flat cable. The maximum number of separate detector interface units that can be connected to an FSSB line is two for HRV2 and HRV3 or one for HRV4. Therefore, for HRV2 and HRV3, up to 16 separate detectors can be connected per line, and for HRV4, up to 8 separate detectors can be connected per line.
NOTE 1 The separate detector interface unit connected to the first or second FSSB line is allowed full close control with the axis for which the first or second FSSB line is set. The interface unit is not allowed full close control with the axis for which the third FSSB line is set.
- 102 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
NOTE 2 The separate detector interface unit connected to the third FSSB line is allowed full close control with the axis for which the third FSSB line is set. The interface unit full is not allowed close control with the axis for which the first or second FSSB line is set. 3 A separate detector interface unit must support the FS30i as a basic unit. 4 Unused optical connectors must be covered with the caps. 5 When using an encoder with an analog output of 1 Vp-p, see the description of the analog input separate detector interface.
7.2.1
Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification

Item Specification Voltage 24 VDC 10% Current 0.9 A (basic unit only) 1.5 A (basic unit + additional unit) A02B-0236-C205 (basic) A02B-0236-C204 (additional) An interface unit can be installed by using screws or a DIN rail.
Power supply capacity
Ordering information Method of installation
7.2.2
Connection of Power Supply
Power to the separate detector interface unit should be supplied from an external 24 V DC power supply. An extended unit is powered by a basic unit.
Separate detector interface unit (basic) CP11A 1 2 3 +24V 0V GND 24 VDC regulated power supply 24 VDC 10% External power supply
Cable CP11A AMP JAPAN 1-178288-3 (Housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) +24V (1) 0V (2)
External power supply Select a connector that matches the pin layout of the external power supply.
Recommended cable specification: A02B-0124-K830 (5 m) (The external power supply end of the cable is provided with M3 crimp terminals.)
The 24 VDC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in branching. The connection of CP11B is identical to that of CP11A. In this case, the power supplied to CP11A should be equal to the sum of the rating of the separate detector interface unit and that of the units after CP11B. Be sure to ground the 0-V line of the power supply to the separate detector interface unit. In addition, keep any noise source (such as an AC power cable and contactor) away from the power line of the separate detector interface unit as far as possible to prevent noise from being picked up through the power line.
- 103 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
Secure the ground line to the ground terminal (GND) for signals of a separate detector interface unit, which is located at the bottom of the unit, with an M3 screw as shown in the figure below. Connect the ground line to the ground plate of the cabinet.
GND
To ground plate of cabinet
NOTE The torque with which a screw is tightened is 5 kgfcm or less.
- 104 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.2.3
Separate Detector Interface (Serial Interface)

Separate detector interface unit JF101 to JF108 (PCR-EV20MDT)
1 11 SD SD 12 2 3 13 4 14 5 REQ 15 6 REQ 16 7 (+6V) 17 8 18 9 19 +5V 10 20
Separate detector
0V 0V 0V +5V +5V
The +6V signal is provided for absolute position detectors that require battery backup.
Cable connection
1 2 5 6 7 18 20 12 14 16
Shielded drain wire Shield Ground plate
SD *SD REQ *REQ (+6V) +5V +5V 0V 0V 0V
SD *SD REQ *REQ (+6V) +5V +5V 0V 0V FG (Frame ground)
Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3-pair) Recommended connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex) FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE 1 The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 A maximum. Lower limit of the 5V signals: 4.95 V for the basic unit, and 4.9 V for the additional unit
- 105 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 2 If the cable is connected to JA4A when the separate absolute pulse coder battery case contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of the feedback connectors (JF101 to JF108). In this case, if the battery line and 0 V are short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the protection circuit within the separate detector interface unit may fail. First, make sure the battery case contains no battery or the cable is not connected to JA4A. Then, complete all cabling work and confirm cables are correctly connected. Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to JA4A.
7.2.4
Separate Detector Interface (Parallel interface)

Separate detector interface unit JF101 to JF108 (PCR-EV20MDT) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PCA PCA PCB PCB PCZ PCZ (+6V) (REQ) +5V 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Separate detector
0V 0V 0V +5V +5V
The +6V and REQ signals are provided for absolute position detectors that require battery backup.
Cable connection
PCA PCA PCB PCB PCZ PCZ (+6V) (REQ) +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 0V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 20 12 14 16 Shield Ground plate
PCA PCA PCB PCB PCZ PCZ (+6V) (REQ) +5V +5V +5V 0V 0V 0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3-pair) Recommended connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex) FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)
- 106 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
NOTE 1 The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply current per detector is 0.35 A maximum. Minimum tolerance to 5 V: 4.95 V for main unit and 4.9 V for added section 2 If the cable is connected to JA4A when the separate absolute pulse coder battery case contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of the feedback connectors (JF101 to JF108). In this case, if the battery line and 0 V are short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the protection circuit within the separate detector interface unit may fail. First, make sure the battery case contains no battery or the cable is not connected to JA4A. Then, complete all cabling work and confirm cables are correctly connected. Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to JA4A.
7.2.5
Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface)
The feedback signals from the separate detectors connected via the parallel interface are defined as follows: (1) A and B phase signal input This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degree phase slip of A and B phase signals. Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phase is leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the state in which the A phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.
Shift in plus direction A phase signal B phase signal A phase signal B phase signal
Shift in minus direction
(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency

A PCA/*PCA 0.5V *PCA/PCA B PCB/*PCB 0.5V *PCB/PCB Td Td Tp Td Td
- 107 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
(3) Z phase signal input
*PCZ PCZ 0.5V
B-63943EN/03
Tw Z phase signal
TOFF
Time requirements
Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF101 to JF108. The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A and B phases. An important factor is time TD from point A, when the potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B, when the potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower than 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is 0.15 s. The period and pulse width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above requirements. The Z phase signals are also differential signals. There are the following requirements for the time from when the potential difference between PCZ and *PCZ exceeds 0.5 V to when it becomes lower than 0.5 V: Tw 1/4 frequency of the A or B phase signals TOFF > 1.5 msec
Input voltage requirements

The voltage of the A and B phase signals must meet the following requirements: High level: 2.4 V or more Low level: 0.8 V or less
Receiver circuit
PCA A-phase signal *PCA 560 5V The same circuit is used for B-phase signals (PCB and *PCB) 110
Rotation directions of a servo motor and separate rotary encoder

If a separate rotary encoder rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of servo motor rotation when the servo motor is rotating, the connection of the feedback cable from the separate rotary encoder must be changed as follows: (1) Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB. (2) Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.
- 108 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.2.6
Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector
Absolute pulse coder battery case
When the separate absolute position detector that needs battery backup is connected, the battery case for the separate absolute pulse coder must be connected.
- 109 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
Separate detector interface unit JA4A (PCR-EV20MDT) 01 02 03 0V 04 05 06 07 +6V 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (M3 terminal) + +6V 0V Battery case for the separate absolute pulse coder
B-63943EN/03
Cable connection JA4A Battery case
+6V 0V
7 3
+ -
+6V 0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL: 2 0.2 mm (7/0.18) Recommended connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex)
NOTE If the cable is connected to JA4A when the separate absolute pulse coder battery case contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of the feedback connectors (JF101 to JF108). In this case, if the battery line and 0 V are short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the protection circuit within the separate detector interface unit may fail. First, make sure the battery case contains no battery or the cable is not connected to JA4A. Then, complete all cabling work and confirm cables are correctly connected. Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to JA4A.
7.2.7
Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit
A flat cable is used to make a connection between the basic unit and additional unit as shown below. A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
- 110 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
Units viewed from top Basic unit Additional unit Mounting surface CNF1 CNF2
Marking
mark
mark
Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface units.
7.2.8
Connector Locations
Connector locations on the basic unit
GND
- 111 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
Connector locations on the additional unit
B-63943EN/03
For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A.
7.2.9
1)
Installation
Notes on installation (1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet. (2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a space of 100 mm above and below the unit. Below an interface unit, do not place equipment that generates a large amount of heat. (3) When using a basic unit and additional unit, place the units as shown below so that the flat cable connecting the units does not block the vent holes. A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
Vent holes Flat cable
Basic unit
Additional unit
- 112 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
2)
Installation using screws

Basic unit Additinal unit
When using both a basic unit and additional unit, install the units as shown above, with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70 to 80 mm.
7.2.10
Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit
CAUTION To install/remove the unit, a screwdriver must be inserted obliquely. So, sufficient access clearances are required on both sides of the unit. As a guideline, if the front of an adjacent unit appears flush with the unit or slightly set back, allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. If the front of an adjacent unit protrudes beyond the front of the unit, allow a clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. Also, when installing the unit near a side of the cabinet, allow a clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the side of the cabinet.
- 113 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
Access clearance near a separate detector interface unit
- 114 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
Installing the unit on the DIN rail

DIN rail
Removing the unit from the DIN rail DIN rail
Installing the unit: 1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail. 2. Push the unit in until it clicks. Removing the unit: 1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver. 2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards you.
CAUTION When removing the unit, be careful not to damage the lock by applying excessive force. When installing and removing the unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the unit so that stress is not applied to the side (that surface with the slits) of the unit.
- 115 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
7.3
ANALOG INPUT SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE

Analog input separate detector interface unit CP11A Servo amplifier module
Control unit or the previous-stage servo amplifier module
COP10B COP10A
1 Vp-p output linear encoder or rotary encoder
- 116 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.3.1
Overview
When a separate detector such as a rotary encoder or linear encoder with an analog output of 1 Vp-p is used, an analog input separate detector interface unit is used. The analog input separate detector unit is connected via an optical cable as a unit on the FSSB line. Up to four 1-Vp-p output separate detectors can be connected to a basic unit. One additional unit (A02B-0236-C204) can be connected to the basic unit with a flat cable. Four separate detectors with digital output can be connected to the additional unit. When five or more 1-Vp-p output separate detectors are to be used, more than one basic unit (analog input separate detector interface unit) is required. The JA4A connector is provided for the battery for absolute position detectors connected to the additional unit. The maximum number of separate detector interface units that can be connected to one FSSB line is two for HRV2 and HRV3 or one for HRV4, regardless of which input type, the analog input type or digital input type, is used. Therefore, for HRV2 and HRV3, up to 16 separate detectors can be connected per line; for HRV4, up to eight separate detectors can be connected.
NOTE 1 The analog input separate detector interface unit connected to the first or second FSSB line is allowed full close control with the axis for which the first or second FSSB line is set. The interface unit is not allowed full close control with the axis for which the third FSSB line is set. 2 The analog input separate detector interface unit connected to the third FSSB line is allowed full close control with the axis for which the third FSSB line is set. The interface unit full is not allowed close control with the axis for which the first or second FSSB line is set. 3 Unused optical connectors must be covered with the caps. 4 A digital output encoder refers to an encoder that outputs A and B rectangular waveforms (parallel) or a FANUC serial interface output encoder (serial). 5 No 1-Vp-p output encoder can be connected to additional units.
(1) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes
CNC
Servo card COP10A Optical fiber cable
Servo amplifier module COP10B COP10A
COP10B COP10A
COP10B Optical fiber cable COP10A
Analog input separate detector interface unit COP10B COP10A 24VDC CP11A JF111 JF112 JF113 JF114 CNF1 JA4A 1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis 1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes
- 117 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
(2) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 5th to 8th axes
Optical fiber cable
B-63943EN/03
Analog input separate detector interface unit COP10B Optical fiber cable 24VDC COP10A CP11A JF111 JF112 JF113 JF114 CNF1 JA4A 1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis 1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes
Analog input separate detector interface unit COP10B COP10A CP11A JF111 JF112 JF113 JF114 CNF1 JA4A 1Vp-p output encoder 5 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 6 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 7 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 8 axes
(3) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes and digital output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes
Optical fiber cable
Analog input separate detector interface unit COP10B COP10A 24VDC CP11A JF111 JF112 JF113 JF114 CNF1 Flat cable JA4A 1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis 1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes Battery for separate absolute position detectors connected to additional unit
Separate detector interface unit (additional unit) CNF2 JF105 JF106 JF107 JF108 Digital output encoder 1 axis Digital output encoder 2 axes Digital output encoder 3 axes Digital output encoder 4 axes
- 118 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
(4) Connecting 1-Vp-p output encoders to the 1st to 4th axes and digital output encoders to the 5th to 8th axes
Optical fiber cable Analog input separate detector interface unit COP10B COP10A CP11A JF111 JF112 JF113 JF114 CNF1 JA4A 1Vp-p output encoder 1 axis 1Vp-p output encoder 2 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 3 axes 1Vp-p output encoder 4 axes
Optical fiber cable 24VDC
Separate detector interface unit (basic unit) COP10B COP10A 24VDC CP11A JF101 JF102 JF103 JF104 CNF1 JA4A Digital output encoder 1 axis Digital output encoder 2 axes Digital output encoder 3 axes Digital output encoder 4 axes Battery for separate absolute detector
Flat cable Separate detector interface unit (additional unit) CNF2 JF105 JF106 JF107 JF108 Digital output encoder 5 axes Digital output encoder 6 axes Digital output encoder 7 axes Digital output encoder 8 axes
7.3.2
Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification

Item Specification
Power supply capacity
Ordering information Method of installation
Voltage 24 VDC 10% Current 0.9 A (basic unit only) 1.5 A (basic unit + additional unit) A06B-6061-C201 (basic) An interface unit can be installed by using screws or a DIN rail.
- 119 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
7.3.3
Connection of Power Supply
Power to the analog input separate detector interface unit should be supplied from an external 24 VDC power supply. An extended unit is powered by a basic unit.
Analog input separate detector interface unit CP11A 1 2 3 +24V 0V GND 24 VDC regulated power supply 24 VDC 10% External power supply
Cable CP11A AMP JAPAN 1-178288-3 (Housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) +24V (1) 0V (2)
External power supply Select a connector that matches the pin layout of the external power supply.
Recommended cable specification: A02B-0124-K830 (5 m) (The external power supply end of the cable is provided with M3 crimp terminals.)
The 24 VDC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in branching. The connection of CP11B is identical to that of CP11A. In this case, the power supplied to CP11A should be equal to the sum of the rating of the analog input separate detector interface unit and that of the units after CP11B. Be sure to ground the 0-V line of the power supply to the analog input separate detector interface unit. In addition, keep any noise source (such as an AC power cable and contactor) away from the power line of the analog input separate detector interface unit as far as possible to prevent noise from being picked up through the power line. Secure the ground line to the ground terminal (GND) for signals of an analog input separate detector interface unit, which is located at the bottom of the unit, with an M3 screw as shown in the figure below. Connect the ground line to the ground plate of the cabinet.
- 120 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
GND
To ground plate of cabinet
NOTE The torque with which a screw is tightened is 5 kgfcm or less.
- 121 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
7.3.4
Analog Input Separate Detector Interface (Analog 1Vp-p Interface)

Analog Input Separate Detector Interface JF111 to F114 (PCR-EV20MDT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 +5V PCA PCB PCB PCZ PCZ 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 +5V NC +5V NC 0V NC 0V NC 0V PCA 12
Analog 1Vp-p output encoder
Leave NC (No Connection) open.
Cable connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 18 20 12 14 16
PCA PCA PCB PCB PCZ PCZ +5V +5V +5V
PCA PCA PCB PCB PCZ PCZ +5V +5V +5V
0V 0V 0V
0V Shielded drain wire 0V FG (Frame ground) Ground plate Shield
Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3-pair) Recommended connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex) FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply current per detector is 0.35 A maximum. The lower limit of the 5V signals is 4.95 V for the basic unit or 4.9 V for the additional unit. Determine the specifications and length of the cable to be used so that the specification of the detector is not exceeded.
- 122 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.3.5
VB
Input Signal Specifications
A/B (Type I)
a/2 a
VA TZ,LZ
VXA,VXB
a/2
VOA,VOB
Z c/2
VOZ Effective component c
0V
c/2
0V
A/B (Type II)

VB VA
b/2 b
VXA VXB
b/2
VOA,VOXA VOB,VOXB
0V
Item
Symbol
Min. spec.
Standard spec.
Max. spec.
Unit
Amplitude (phase A/B)
Amplitude (phase Z) Center value (DC level) Offset voltage (phase A/B) Offset voltage (phase Z) Pulse width of phase Z Length of phase Z Input impedance Input frequency
Type I a of phase A and phase B Type II Sum of b of phase A and b of phase XA Sum of b of phase B and b of phase XB Sum of c of Z and c of XZ (analog signal) Type I VOA,VXA ,VOB,VXB Type II VOA,VOXA ,VOB,VOXB VOZ,VOXZ Type I VOA-VXA , VOB-VXB Type II VOA-VOXA , VOB-VOXB VOZ-VOXZ TZ LZ
0.6
1.0
1.5
VP-P
0.2
0.4
2.0 -0.1 -0.05 600 1/4 100 -
2.5 0 0 120 -
3.0 +0.1 +0.05 140 200
V V V nSec Pitch of A (or B) kHz
The detection precision depends on the precision of signals from the encoder.
- 123 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
7.3.6
Method for Checking the Encoder Signals
The check pin board can be used to observe ADIF (differential amplified signal from A and XA input signals), BDIF (differential amplified signal from B and XB input signals), T0 (reference voltage), and PZ (compared digital signal from Z and XZ input signals). (1) Ordering specifications A06B-6071-K290 Details A20B-1005-0340 Printed circuit board with check pins A660-2042-T031#L200R0 200-mm cable (2) Connection Connect the check pin board to the cable of which axis you want to observe the signals.
Analog input separate detector interface unit

Check pin board JF111 JF112 JF113 JF114 JA4A 1Vp-p output encoder for 1st axis 1Vp-p output encoder for 2nd axis 1Vp-p output encoder for 3rd axis 1Vp-p output encoder for 4th axis
(3) Signal output
<5> <10> <15> <20> CN1
<4> <9> <14> <19>
<3> <8> <13> <18>
<2> <7> <12> <17>
<1> <6> <11> <16> CN2
Pin number
Signal name
Remarks
<11> <13> <15> <19> <9>, <18>, <20> <12>, <14>, <16>
ADIF BDIF T0 PZ +5V 0V
Differential amplified signal from A and XA input signals ADIF = 2 (XA A) Differential amplified signal from B and XB input signals BDIF = 2 (XB B) Reference voltage 2.5VDC (=1/2Vcc) Compared digital signal from Z and XZ input signals Power Signal ground
- 124 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.3.7
Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector
When a separate absolute position detector that requires battery backup is connected to an additional unit, a battery case for the separate absolute pulse coder must be connected to JA4A of the analog input separate detector interface unit.
Analog input separate detector interface unit JA4A (PCR-EV20MDT) 01 02 03 0V 04 05 06 07 +6V 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (M3 terminal) + +6V 0V Battery case for the separate absolute pulse coder
Cable connection JA4A Battery case
+6V 0V
7 3
+ -
+6V 0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL: 2 0.2 mm (7/0.18) Recommended connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex)
NOTE If the cable is connected to JA4A when the separate absolute pulse coder battery case contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied to the battery power supply pin (+6 V) for each of the feedback connectors (JF105 to JF108). In this case, if the battery line and 0 V are short-circuited, the battery may heat up or the protection circuit within the separate detector interface unit may fail. First, make sure the battery case contains no battery or the cable is not connected to JA4A. Then, complete all cabling work and confirm cables are correctly connected. Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to JA4A.
- 125 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
7.3.8
Connection Between the Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit and Additional Unit
A flat cable is used to connect the analog input separate detector interface unit and additional unit as shown below. The flat cable is 100 mm long.
Units viewed from top Analog input separate detector interface unit Additional unit Mounting surface CNF1 CNF2
Marking
mark
mark
Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface units.
7.3.9
Connector Locations
Connector locations on the analog input separate detector interface unit
GND
For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A.

- 126 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE
7.3.10
1)
Installation
Notes on installation (1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet. (2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a space of 100 mm above and below the unit. Below an interface unit, do not place equipment that generates a large amount of heat. (3) When using an analog input separate detector interface unit and addition unit, place the units as shown below so that the flat cable connecting the units does not block the vent holes. A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
Vent holes
Flat cable
Analog input separate detector interface unit
Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)
2)
Installation using screws

Analog input separate detector interface unit Additional unit
When using both an analog input separate detector interface unit and additional unit, install the units as shown above, with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70 to 80 mm.
- 127 -
7.SERVO INTERFACE
B-63943EN/03
7.3.11
Notes on Installing an Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit
CAUTION To install/remove the unit, a screwdriver must be inserted obliquely. So, sufficient access clearances are required on both sides of the unit. As a guideline, if the front of an adjacent unit appears flush with the unit or slightly set back, allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. If the front of an adjacent unit protrudes beyond the front of the unit, allow a clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. Also, when installing the unit near a side of the cabinet, allow a clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the side of the cabinet.
Access clearance near an analog input separate detector interface unit
- 128 -
B-63943EN/03
7.SERVO INTERFACE

DIN rail
Removing the unit from the DIN rail DIN rail
Installing the unit: 1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail. 2. Push the unit in until it clicks. Removing the unit: 1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver. 2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards you.
CAUTION When removing the unit, be careful not to damage the lock by applying excessive force. When installing and removing the unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the unit so that stress is not applied to the side (that surface with the slits) of the unit.
- 129 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B-63943EN/03
CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link

WARNING An I/O unit may not operate normally due to a control unit, I/O unit, or input power failure, or communication error. To prevent accidents even in this case, design the machine to operate safely by making a safety circuit outside the I/O unit. All DO signals of an I/O unit are designed to be turned off if a system alarm occurs in the control unit which controls the I/O unit, or if the power to the control unit or I/O unit is turned off. However, it cannot be guaranteed that DO signals of the I/O unit will certainly be turned off. Therefore, manage the signals related to safety by making a safety circuit outside of the I/O unit. The dual check safety function can be used to detect a single failure in the safety-related section. For details of the dual check safety function, refer to the FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A Dual Check Safety Connection Manual (B-64003EN).
8.1
OVERVIEW
The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which connects the CNC, cell controller, I/O Unit-A, or Power Mate and transfers I/O signals (bit data) at high speeds between each device. The FANUC I/O Link regards one device as the master and other devices as slaves when more than one device is connected. Input signals from the slaves are sent to the master at specified intervals. Output signals from the master are also sent to the slaves at specified intervals.
8.2
CONNECTION
With 30i series, the I/O Link interface connector JD51A (for three channels) is provided on the main board. Also, the JD1A connector (for the fourth channel) is provided on the additional axis board. In the I/O there are the master station and its slave stations. The master is the control unit of the CNC, and the slave is the I/O unit-A. The slaves are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of two base I/O units can be connected as a group. The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O points is 1024. For slave units, JD1A and JD1B are provided. All units with I/O Link functions have these connectors. A cable must always be connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1A of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a terminator. The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on Subsec. 8.2.1. Use the figures when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
- 130 -
B-63943EN/03

Control unit JD51A (JD1A)
I/O256/256 or less per group
FANUC I/O Link
I/O1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link
FANUC I/O Unit-A 2max Control unit Base unit 1 JD1B JD1A Base unit 2 Magnetic circuit
Max. 16 group
JD1B JD1A : JD1B JD1A
Fig. 8.2 I/O Link connection diagram
- 131 -

Control unit
B-63943EN/03
Rear of the unit
JD51A I/O Link I/O UNIT-A JD1B
I/O UNIT-A This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to a LCD-mounted type 30i series.
24VDC
8.2.1
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable
- 132 -
B-63943EN/03
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not necessary when connecting with a metal cable. A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link Adapter is not used. No connections must be made to the pins with brackets ([ ]) because they are used in JD51A when the second and third channels are connected in the FANUC I/O Link. Do not make a connection to a pin for which no signal is assigned.
Recommended cable connectors PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.) 52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
8.2.2
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable
The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O Link adapter. The length of the electrical cable connected to the optical conversion adapter must not exceed 2 m. In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable. When the cable is more than 10 meters long. When the cable is more than 15 meters long if it is laid within the same cabinet. When the cable is run between different cabinets, and the cabinets cannot be connected with each other via a ground wire of 5.5 mm2 or more. If the power magnetics cabinet includes an I/O Link slave unit, and cables are connected through a duct to the operator's panel (as shown below), the control section I/O Link slave unit can be assumed to be incorporated in the same cabinet.
- 133 -
B-63943EN/03
When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; for example :When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cable such as a welding machine. When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a long distance in parallel with the cable.
External dimension of optical link adapter
Weight of optical link adapter

Main body: Approx. 100 g.
Connection
Connection diagram
- 134 -
B-63943EN/03
2 3
Recommended cable connectors PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.) 52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L-0001-0284#10P Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
Optical cable
Specification: A66L-6001-0009# L5R003................................................................. 5 m long A66L-6001-0009# L10R03................................................................. 10 m long A66L-6001-0009# L15R03................................................................. 15 m long Cable length Maximum length: 200 m (standard type) Maximum length: 100 m (high-speed type)
NOTE Be careful not bend optical cables to a radius of 25 mm or less. Be extremely careful not to twist them.
Maximum number of connectable stages Up to 16 high-speed type I/O link adapter stages can be connected in one I/O link, while only up to five conventional I/O link adapters (standard type) can be connected. 1) Standard type (A13B-0154-B001) ... up to 5 adapter stages can be connected in series 2) Standard type (A13B-0154-B002) ... up to 16 adapter stages can be connected in series
NOTE It is impossible to use both high-speed and standard type adapters on the same line.
Power supply The same power supply type can be used for both the standard type (A13B-0154-B001) and high-speed type (A13B-0154-B002). (a) Power supply voltage: 4.75 to 5.25 V (at receiving end) (b) Required current: 200 mA Installation conditions (a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it with the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet. (b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link adapter. (c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact with other circuits to prevent possible short-circuits. When mounting the optical link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L-type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical link adapter.
- 135 -
B-63943EN/03
Required parts (a) For making up an I/O Link using the optical link adapter, the following parts are necessary: <1> Optical I/O Link adapter............................................................................ 2 <2> Interunit connecting cable.......................................................................... 2 <3> Optical cable .............................................................................................. 1 Relay with an optical fiber connection adapter For the outline drawing of the optical fiber connection adapter, see Appendix D.
NOTE Optical fiber cables can be relayed only at are location. When a high-speed optical link adapter is used, no optical fiber connection adapter can be used.
Maximum transmission distance with an optical fiber cable(s) The table below shows the maximum transmission distance with an optical fiber cable(s), which varies depending on whether a connection adapter is used for a relay.
Number of relay Standard type High-speed type 0 1 0 1 Maximum transmission distance 200m 100m (total) 100m N/A
8.2.3
Connection when Multiple Channels of FANUC I/O Links are Used
With 30i series, up to four channels can be used for the FANUC I/O Link interface. This feature allows the number of I/O points to be increased to 4096 (4096 input points and 4096 output points). Series 30i-MODEL A PMC Programming Manual is available separately to let you know how to use this feature, PMCs that can take advantage of this feature, and the series and version of their management software as well as the series and version of the CNC management software. Signals for three channels are assigned to the FANUC I/O Link connector (JD51A) on the main board. When using only one channel, see Subsection 8.2.1. When using the second and third channels, use the I/O Link branching adapter for two channels or the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels to branch the FANUC I/O Link.
NOTE A maximum of eight groups can be connected to the FANUC I/O Unit-Model B with four channels.
Using the second channel

To use the second channel, use the I/O Link branching adapter to set a branch in the FANUC I/O Link.
- 136 -
B-63943EN/03
Connection
CNC JD51A I/O Link branching adapter JD44B JD1A-1 FANUC I/O Link channel 1
JD1A-2
FANUC I/O Link channel 2
Connection after the I/O Link branching adapter is the same as that for the FANUC I/O Link.
Part number of the I/O Link branching adapter: A20B-1007-0680 (60 g)
Connection between the CNC and I/O Link branching adapter
The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave the +5V pin unconnected. The signals with brackets ([ ]) are used when three channels are connected in the FANUC I/O Link.
- 137 -
B-63943EN/03
Cabling
Recommended cable connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0284#10P
Connection between the I/O Link branching adapter and FANUC I/O Link I/O units
The I/O Link branching adapter can be connected to I/O units in the same way as for the conventional FANUC I/O Link. See 8.2.1.
Cable length
CNC JD51A lA I/O Link branching adapter JD44B JD1A-1 lB JD1B I/O unit
JD1A-2
- 138 -
B-63943EN/03
The total of lA and lB must not exceed 10 m; where lA is the length of the cable between connector JD51A on the CNC and connector JD44B on the I/O Link branching adapter, and lB is the length of the cable between connector JD1A-1 or JD1A-2 on the I/O Link branching adapter and connector JD1B on the I/O unit. When all cables are accommodated in the same cabinet, however, a total cable length of up to 15 m is allowed.
Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter

Install the I/O Link branching adapter in a hermetically sealed cabinet like the CNC.
External dimensions of the I/O Link branching adapter

60
JD44B 34 23
JD1A-1
JD1A-2
45
85 Unit : mm
Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection and routing of cables.
Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter

1) Installation on the DIN rail
35 25
Unit: mm
Recommended DIN rail
2)
Screwing
11.6
2-M4
70
Unit: mm
Drilling on the plate
- 139 -
B-63943EN/03
Using the third channel

When using channel 3, use the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels to branch the FANUC I/O Link.
CNC JD51A I/O Link branching adapter for three channels JD51B JD44A-1 JD44A-2 I/O Link channel 1 and channel 2 I/O Link channel 2 and channel 3
JD1A
I/O Link channel 3
The connection after the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels is the same as that for the conventional FANUC I/O Link.
I/O Link branching adapter for three channels: A20B-1008-0360
Connection between the CNC and I/O Link branching adapter for three channels
The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave the +5V pin unconnected.
- 140 -
B-63943EN/03
Cable connection
Recommended cable connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) Connector FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) cannot be used as connector JD51A for the stand-alone type 30i series main CPU board. Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0284#10P
Signal configuration of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels
- 141 -
B-63943EN/03
Connection between the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels and each channel
The connection between the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels and each channel is the same as that for the conventional FANUC I/O Link. However, keep the following in mind. Connector JD44A-1 outputs I/O Link channel 1 and channel 2 signals and connector JD44A-2 outputs I/O Link channel 2 and channel 3 signals. Connector JD1A is dedicated to I/O Link channel 3. 1) When the FANUC I/O Link is branched to three channels, normal I/O cables are used for JD44A-1, JD44A-2, and JD1A. Channel 1 corresponds to JD44A-1, channel 2 corresponds to JD44A-2, and channel 3 corresponds to JD1A. 2) When channels 1 and 2 are extended together, the I/O Link branching adapter (A20B-1007-0680) must be connected to JD44A-1 to branch channel 1 and channel 2 at the end of the adapter. JD1A is used as channel 3. JD44A-2 is not used. 3) When channels 2 and 3 are extended together, the I/O Link branching adapter (A20B-1007-0680) must be connected to JD44A-2 to branch to channel 2 and channel 3 at the end of the adapter. JD44A-1 is used as channel 1. JD1A is not used. 1) When three channels are branched
CNC I/O Link branching adapter for three channels
JD51A
JD51B
JD44A-1
Channel 1
JD44A-2
Channel 2
JD1A
Channel 3
2)
When channels 1 and 2 are extended together

CNC I/O Link branching adapter for three channels JD51A JD51B JD44A-1 I/O Link branching adapter (A20B-1007-0680) JD44B JD1A-1 JD1A-2 JD44A-2 Channel 1 Channel 2
JD1A
Channel 3
- 142 -
B-63943EN/03
3)
When channels 2 and 3 are extended together

CNC I/O Link branching adapter for three channels JD51A JD51B JD44A-1 Channel 1 I/O Link branching adapter (A20B-1007-0680) JD44B JD1A-1 JD1A-2 JD1A
JD44A-2
Channel 2 Channel 3
Connection between the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels and I/O Link branching adapter for two channels
The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for optical fiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave the +5V pin unconnected.
- 143 -
B-63943EN/03
Cable connection
Recommended cable connectors: PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu) 52622-2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) Connector FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) cannot be used as connector JD51A for the stand-alone type 30i series main CPU board. Recommended cable: A66L-0001-0284#10P
Cable length
CNC JD51A LA I/O Link branching adapter JD51B JD44A-1 JD44A-2 JD1A LB I/O Unit JD1B
- 144 -
B-63943EN/03
The total of LA and LB must not exceed 10 m; where LA is the length of the cable between connector JD51A on the CNC and connector JD51B on the I/O Link branching adapter, and LB is the length of the cable between connector JD44A-1, JD44A-2, or JD1A on the I/O Link branching adapter and connector JD1B on the I/O unit. When all cables are accommodated in the same cabinet, however, a total cable length of up to 15 m is allowed.
Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels

Install the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels in a hermetically sealed cabinet like the CNC.
External dimensions of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels
80 JD51B JD44A-1 JD44A-2 JD1A
34 23
45
105 Unit : mm
Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection and routing of cables.
Installation of the I/O Link branching adapter for three channels

1) Installation on the DIN rail
35 25
Unit: mm
Recommended DIN rail
2)
Screwing
11.6
2-M4
90
Unit: mm
Drilling on the plate
Using the fourth channel

To use the fourth channel in the FANUC I/O Link, an additional axis board is required. Use the JD1A connector. See Subsection 8.2.1.
- 145 -
B-63943EN/03
8.3
UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O Link
Basically, the 30i series can be connected to any unit that has a FANUC I/O Link slave interface. The following table lists general units that can be connected to the Series 30i. Detailed descriptions of each unit are given later in this section. For details of other units, refer to the documentation provided with the unit.
General units that can be connected to the 30i series Unit FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A Description Modular I/O unit that supports a combination of the input/output signals required by a power magnetics circuit. Distribution type I/O unit that supports a combination of input/output signals required by a power magnetics circuit. Compact handy operation panel, used for operation on the machine side, that consists of the manual pulse generator, emergency stop switch, enable switch, display unit, and input key. Distribution type I/O unit that handles the input/output signals required by the power magnetics circuit; it has an interface with a manual pulse generator. Unit having an interface with a machine operator's panel; it has an interface with a manual pulse generator. Unit having an interface with a machine operator's panel that handles the input/output signals required by the power magnetics circuit; it has an interface with a manual pulse generator. Unit having an interface with a power magnetics panel that handles the input/output signals required by the power magnetics circuit. Unit connecting FANUC I/O Link masters to enable the transfer of DI/DO signals Unit connected with the CNC via the FANUC I/O Link to control a servo motor The appearance of this machine operator's panel is consistent with that of the 30i series. The panel can easily be customized. Reference Connection and maintenance manual B-61813E Connection and maintenance manual B-62163E Connection Manual B-63753EN
FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL B
Handy Machine operator's panel
Connector panel I/O module Operator's panel I/O module (for matrix input) Operator's panel I/O module
Sec. 8.4
Sec. 8.5
Sec. 8.6
Power magnetics panel I/O module FANUC I/O Link connection unit FANUC servo unit series (with I/O Link) Standard machine operator's panel
Sec. 8.6
Sec.8.7 Sec.8.8 Sec.8.9
- 146 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4
8.4.1
CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE

Configuration
Flat cable for module connection
Direction to be used when the modules are connected directly to the connection printed circuit board
Direction to be used when the modules are mounted using DIN rails or screws
JD1A JD1B
Extension module 3 Extension module 2 Extension module 1 (with manual pulse generator) Basic module
I/O Link cable
Manual pulse generator cable
NOTE For direction connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules are installed to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DIN rails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installation plane.
- 147 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.2
Connection Diagram
JD51A
NOTE Extension modules A, B, C, and D can be installed in any position of extension modules 1, 2, and 3. If a manual pulse generator interface is required, however, be sure to install extension module A in extension module 1. Other modules cannot be installed in extension module 1.
8.4.3
Module Specifications
Name Drawing No. A03B-0815-C001 A03B-0815-C002 Specifications DI/DO : 24/16 DI/DO : 24/16 With MPG interface Reference item
Types of modules
I/O module for connection (basic module) I/O module for connection (expansion module A)
- 148 -
B-63943EN/03

Name Drawing No. A03B-0815-C003 A03B-0815-C004 A03B-0815-C005 A03B-0815-K002 A03B-0815-K100 Specifications DI/DO : 24/16 Without MPG interface DO : 16 2A output module Analog input module 1A (For basic module) 20 mm long Suitable for a module interval of 32 mm Note Reference item
I/O module for connection (expansion module B) I/O module for connection (expansion module C) I/O module for connection (expansion module D) Fuse (accessory) Inter-module flat cable
NOTE Up to two analog input modules can be connected to one basic module.
Module specifications (common items)
Item Interface with CNC Interface between basic module and expansion modules Specifications FANUC I/O Link connection Bus connection using a flat cable Remarks Expandable up to 16 units or 1024/1024 points as CNC slaves Up to three expansion modules connectable per basic module
For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to each module, see the relevant pages of each item.
Installation conditions
Ambient temperature for the unit Temperature change Humidity Vibration Atmosphere Operation: 0C to 55C Storage and transportation:-20C to 60C 1.1C/minute maximum Normal condition:75% (relative humidity) Short term (within one month):95% (relative humidity) Operation: 0.5 G or less Normal machining factory environment (For use in an environment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant, organic solutions, and so forth, additional measures are required.) (1) Use each I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet. (2) For ventilation within each I/O module, each module must be installed in the orientation shown below. Moreover, for ventilation and wiring, allow a clearance of 100 mm or more above and below each module. Never place a device that generates a large amount of heat below an I/O module. (3) While referring to Section 8.4.17, ensure that the vent hole of the basic module is not obstructed by the flat cable.
Upper side
Expansion module 2 Expansion module 3
Other conditions
I/O Link connection MPG connection
Expansion module 1
Basic module
Lower side
- 149 -
B-63943EN/03
Power supply rating

Module Basic module Expansion modules A and B Expansion module C (2A module) Expansion module D (analog input module) Power supply voltage 24 VDC 10% is fed through the I/O connector (CB150) of the basic module; 10% includes momentary variations and ripples. Power supply rating 0.2A+7.3mADI 0.1A+7.3mADI 0.1A 0.1A Remarks Number of DI points with DI=ON Number of DI points with DI=ON
As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [power supply capacity 24 (W)].
8.4.4
DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment
This section describes the DI/DO connector pin allocation of the basic module and expansion modules A and B.
NOTE 1 The DI and DO addresses for the basic and extension modules run contiguously. These basic and extension module DI and DO addresses are allocated to the I/O Link as a group. For example, when the DI and DO top addresses are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4 and n = 0), respectively, then the addresses are allocated as shown in the following table. 2 Pins 18 and 50 (+24V) of connector CB150 are used to apply 24 V externally to a module. Be sure to connect these pins because the +24 V applied to the module is used internally.
DI Basic module Extension module 1 Extension module 2 Extension module 3 X4 to X6 X7 to X9 X10 to X12 X13 to X15 DO Y0 to Y1 Y2 to Y3 Y4 to Y5 Y6 to Y7
- 150 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.5
DI (Input Signal) Connection
This section describes the DI (input signal) connections of the basic module and expansion modules A and B. A maximum of 96 points are provided (24 points per module; 1 basic module + 3 extension modules).
- 151 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the 0 V power supply is recommended whereever possible. For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 or from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7. See 8.4.19 for information about how to allocate the emergency stop signal. For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the logic is fixed to "0". For unused pins allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed to "0" when the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the 0 V power supply. When the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to "1". The logic of the unused pins allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 is variable when the contact of the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is open.
- 152 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.6
DO (Output Signal) Connection
This section describes the DO (output signal) connections of the basic module and expansion modules A and B. A maximum of 64 points are provided (16 points per module; 1 basic module + 3 extension modules).
- 153 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.7
DI/DO Signal Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the DI/DO signals used with the basic module and expansion modules A and B. DI (input signal specifications)
Number of points Contact rating Leakage current between contacts when opened Voltage decrease between contacts when closed Delay time 30 VDC, 16 mA or more 1 mA or less (26.4 V) 2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease) The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered. 24 points (per module)
DO (output signal specifications)

Number of points Maximum load current when ON Saturation voltage when ON Withstand voltage Leakage current when OFF Delay time 16 points (per module) 200 mA or less including momentary variations 1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations 20 A or less The driver delay time is 50 s (maximum). In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals) By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turned off at the same time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
DOCOM ON OFF
DO state when DO is ON on in the sequence OFF DO state when DO is ON OFF off in the sequence
NOTE When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicated above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be supplied to the I/O module must not be turned off during operation. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when or after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection A DO load current of twice the level can be obtained by connecting DO points in parallel and exercising ON/OFF control at the same time in the sequence. Namely, the maximum load current per DO point is 200 mA. By connecting two DO points in parallel and turning on the two DO points at the same time, 400 mA can be obtained. In this case, however, the leakage current is doubled up to 40 mA when the DO points are turned off.
- 154 -
B-63943EN/03
DOCOM
CB150(01),(33)
+24V 0V +24 V regulated power supply
Relay DV
DV
8.4.8
2A Output Connector Pin Allocation
This section describes the 2A output connector pin allocation of expansion module C.
NOTE 1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous. Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a group covering the basic and expansion modules. That is, when the first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4, n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below. 2 When the 2A output module is used, the DI addresses of the module cannot be used. (When the 2A output module is used as expansion module 3, X13 through X15 cannot be used.)
- 155 -

DI Basic module Expansion module 1 Expansion module 2 Expansion module 3 X4 to X6 X7 to X9 X10 to X12 X13 to X15 DO Y0 to Y1 Y2 to Y3 Y4 to Y5 Y6 to Y7
B-63943EN/03
8.4.9
2A DO (Output Signal) Connection
This section describes the 2A output connector connections of expansion module C.
- 156 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.10
2A Output DO Signal Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the 2A output DO signals used with expansion module C. DO (output signal specifications)
Number of points Maximum load current when ON Withstand voltage Leakage current when OFF Delay time 16 points (per module) 2 A or less per point. 12 A maximum for the entire module (DO: 16 points) (including momentary variations). 24 V +20% or less (including momentary variations) 100 A or less [I/O Link transfer time (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] must be considered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals) By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turned off at one time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
DOCOM ON OFF
DO state when DO is ON on in the sequence OFF DO state when DO is ON OFF off in the sequence
NOTE When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of DOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicated above by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be supplied to the I/O module must not be turned off during operation. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when or after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection The 2A output module does not allow parallel DO connections including parallel connections with the DO signals of other modules.
- 157 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.11
Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation
This section describes the analog input connector pin allocation of expansion module D.
NOTE 1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous. Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a group covering the basic and expansion modules. That is, when the first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4, n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below. 2 When the analog input module, the DO space is also used as an input channel selection area.
DI Basic module Expansion module 1 Expansion module 2 Expansion module 3 X4 to X6 X7 to X9 X10 to X12 X13 to X15 DO Y0 to Y1 Y2 to Y3 Y4 to Y5 Y6 to Y7
- 158 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.12
Analog Input Signal Connections
This section provides a diagram of the analog input connector connections of expansion module D.
NOTE 1 In the diagram above, n represents each channel (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). 2 Current input or voltage input can be selected on a channel-by-channel basis. For current input, connect JMPn to INPn. 3 For the connection, use a shielded twisted pair. 4 In the diagram above, the shield of each channel is connected to FGNDn, and FGND is used for shield processing of all channels. However, the shield of a channel may be directly connected to frame ground with a cable clamp, instead of using FGNDn. 5 If the voltage (current) source has a GND pin, as shown in the figure above, connect COMn to this pin. Otherwise, connect INMn and COMn together in the analog input module.
- 159 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.13
Analog Input Signal Specifications
This section describes the specifications of the analog input signals used with expansion module D.
Item Number of input channels (Note) Analog input Four channels DC -10 to +10 V (Input resistance: 4.7 M) DC -20 to +20 mA (Input resistance: 250 ) 12 bits (binary)
Analog input +10V +5V or +20mA 0V or 0mA -5V or -20mA -10V Digital output +2000 +1000 0 -1000 -2000
Specifications
Remarks
Voltage input or current input can be selected on channel-by-channel basis. Represented as two's complement
Digital output (Note) Input/output correspondence
Resolution Overall precision Maximum input voltage/current Minimum conversion time (Note) Number of occupied input/output points (Note)
5 mV or 20 A Voltage input: 0.5% Current input: 1% 15V/30mA Ladder scan period of CNC connected DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes
With respect to full scale
NOTE This analog input module has four input channels. The digital output section consists of a group of 12 bits within the three-byte occupied input points. This means that the channel to be used can be dynamically selected by the ladder. The channel switching DO point for channel selection is included in the two-byte occupied output points.
8.4.14
Analog Input Specifications
(Digital output) This digital input module has four input channels. The digital output section consists of a group of 12 bits within the three-byte occupied input points. The output format is indicated below.
Address in the module Xm (even-numbered address) Xm+1 (odd-numbered address) 7 D07 0 6 D06 0 5 D05 CHB 4 D04 CHA 3 D03 D11 2 D02 D10 1 D01 D09 0 D00 D08
D00 to D11 represent 12-bit digital output data. D00 and D11 correspond to weightings of 20 and 211, respectively. D11 is a sign bit expressed as a two's complement. CHA and CHB represent analog input channels. This means that when the two bytes above are read with a PMC program, the A-D converted data of the CHA and CHB input channels can be read from D11 to D00. For CHA and CHB, see the description of channel selection, below. Section 6.3 provides notes on reading data with a PMC program.
- 160 -
B-63943EN/03
(Channel selection) With this analog input module, which of the four channels is to be output to the digital output section must be determined with a PMC program. The DO points used for this selection are CHA and CHB (two-byte occupied output points). These are mapped as indicated below.
Address in the module Yn Yn+1 7 X X 6 X X 5 X X 4 X X 3 X X 2 X X 1 X CHB 0 X CHA
By writing the values indicated below to CHA and CHB, the corresponding channel is selected, and the A-D converted data of the channel and the data of the selected channel can be read as DI data. The character X indicated above represents an unused bit, so that either 1 or 0 may be written in place of X.
CHB 0 0 1 1 CHA 0 1 0 1 Channel selected Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4
(Address) The start address of X (DI) of the basic modules including the analog input module must always be allocated at an even-numbered address. With this allocation, the digital output addresses of the analog input module are as described below, depending on where the analog input module is allocated When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansion module 1 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module Xm+3 (odd-numbered address) Xm+4 (even-numbered address) Xm+5 (odd-numbered address) 7 D07 0 6 D06 0 5 D05 CHB 4 3 Undefined D04 D03 CHA D11 2 D02 D10 1 D01 D09 0 D00 D08
When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansion module 2 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module Xm+6 (even-numbered address) Xm+7 (odd-numbered address) Xm+8 (even-numbered address) 7 D07 0 6 D06 0 5 D05 CHB 4 3 D04 D03 CHA D11 Undefined 2 D02 D10 1 D01 D09 0 D00 D08
When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansion module 3 (m represents the allocation start address.)
Address in the module Xm+9 (odd-numbered address) Xm+10 (even-numbered address) Xm+11 (odd-numbered address) 7 D07 0 6 D06 0 5 D05 CHB 4 3 Undefined D04 D03 CHA D11 2 D02 D10 1 D01 D09 0 D00 D08
NOTE When two-byte digital output addresses are to be referenced with a PMC program, a read must always be performed word-by-word (16 bits).
- 161 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.15
Manual Pulse Generator Connection
An example in which three manual pulse generators are connected to extension module A is shown below.
Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0286 (#20 AWG 6 + #24 AWG 3 pairs) Recommended connector: A02B-0120-K303 (including the following connector and case) (Connector: FI40-2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)) (Case: FI40-20-CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)) Recommended cables: A02B-0120-K841 (7 m) (for connecting three manual pulse generators) A02B-0120-K848 (7 m) (for connecting two manual pulse generators) A02B-0120-K847 (7 m) (for connecting one manual pulse generator) (These cables do not include the wire shown in the above figure.)
NOTE The number of connectable manual pulse generators depends on the type and option configuration.
- 162 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.16
Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator
Like a pulse coder, the manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC. The supply voltage drop due to the cable resistance must be held below 0.2 V (when those of the 0-volt and 5-volt wires are combined), as expressed in the following expression:
0.2 0.1R2L m where 0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A) R = resistance per unit cable length (/m) m = number of 0-volt and 5-volt wires L = cable length (m).
Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the following expression.
L m R
In the case of the A66L-0001-0286 cable, for example, when three pairs of signal wires and six power supply wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 /m) are used (three power supply wires connected to 5 V and the other three to 0 V), the cable length is:
L 3 0.0394 =76.75[m]
However, the maximum pulse transmission distance for the manual pulse generator is 50 m. Taking this into consideration, the cable length may be extended to: 38.37 m (when two generators are used), or 25.58 m (when three generators are used).
- 163 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.17
Connection of Basic and Extension Modules
Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you are connecting the basic module to an extension module or connecting two extension modules. Connect the modules by using 34-pin flat cable connectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34 pins at one end of the cable are connected to the corresponding pins at the other end; e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same designation (A1) at the other end.
NOTE Modules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of about 20 mm in length is required. To install modules further away from each other, the cable length will be 20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the maximum length of a flat cable is 300 mm. To ensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat cables lie on top of them. The basic module has a vent at the top (as indicated by the dotted lines in the above figure). When connecting modules, install extension modules so that the flat cables do not cover the vent, as shown in the above figure. Therefore, for direct connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules are installed to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DIN rails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installation plane.
- 164 -
B-63943EN/03
8.4.18
Module Installation
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly (external module view and mounting diagram)
Dimensions of connector panel printed circuit board 0.2 Board thickness 1.6mm Square hole
Note
No. 1 pin
Square hole
I/O interface
I/O Link interface MPG interface (for extension module)
JD1A
JD1B
Connector panel printed circuit board connector specification: HONDA MRH-50FD (50-pin female straight connector without fitting)
NOTE 1 A connector with a fitting (HONDA MRH-50RMA) is used for the module-side I/O interface. Always use a connector having no fitting for the connector panel printed circuit board. 2 Area where pattern printing is prohibited : Prohibited area on soldered side : Prohibited area on component side
- 165 -
B-63943EN/03
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly (mounting and dismounting a module)
Hook
connector panel printed circuit board
Stopper
Mounting the module 1. Insert the hook of the module into the square hole located at the upper part of the connector panel printed circuit board. 2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, push the module in the direction of B , and attach the module's connector to the connector on the printed circuit board. 3. Push the stopper into the lower hole of the printed circuit board until it clicks into place. Dismounting the module 1. Press the stopper C upward. 2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the module in the direction of A .
NOTE When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
- 166 -
B-63943EN/03
When mounting a DIN rail (external module view and mounting diagram)
Mount the DIN rail here.
Note
JD1B
JD1A
I/O interface I/O Link interface
MPG interface (for extension module)
NOTE Recommended connector: A02B-0098-K891 (including the following connector and case) (Connector: HONDA MR-50FH solder type) (Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type) Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
- 167 -

When mounting a DIN rail (mounting and dismounting a module)
B-63943EN/03
NOTE When dismounting the module, take care not to damage the stopper by applying excessive force with the screwdriver. When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
- 168 -
B-63943EN/03
Screw holes
I/O interface I/O Link interface
MPG interface (for extension module) JD1A JD1B
When mounting a module using screws (external module view and mounting diagram)
NOTE Recommended connector: A02B-0098-K891 (including the following connector and case) (Connector: HONDA MR-50FH solder type) (Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type) Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
8.4.19
Other Notes
DO signal reaction to a system alarm

There is a possibility that the I/O module will not operate normally due to a failure of the CNC or I/O Link slave unit, or an input power abnormality. To prevent accidents even in this case, design the system so that the machine operates safely, by providing a safety circuit and the like outside the I/O module. The circuit of this I/O module is designed so that all DO signals are turned off if a system alarm occurs in the CNC that controls the I/O module, or if the power to the CNC or I/O module is turned off. However, it cannot be guaranteed that the DO signals of the I/O module will certainly be turned off. Therefore, for signals related to safety, provide a safety circuit outside this I/O module.
- 169 -
B-63943EN/03
Address allocation
For the connector panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map Xm Xm+1 Xm+2 Xm+3 Xm+4 Xm+5 Xm+6 Xm+7 Xm+8 Xm+9 Xm+10 Xm+11 Xm+12 (for 1st MPG) Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG) Xm+15(DO alarm detection) Basic module DO space map Yn Yn+1 Yn+2 Yn+3 Yn+4 Yn+5 Yn+6 Yn+7 Basic module
Extension module 1 Extension module 2 Extension module 3
Extension module 1
Extension module 2
Extension module 3
Extension module 1
Basic module
The basic connector panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). Up to three hardware extension modules can be added or removed as required. The reason for this address allocation is explained below. The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies a DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed regardless of whether extension module 2 or 3 is used, and Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG. Therefore, when using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly. DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This address is fixed regardless of whether extension module 2 or 3 is used, and it must be allocated as a work area before it can be used. When using this area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes. Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the connector panel I/O modules freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the following in mind. Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for Series 30i)
7 X0004 SKIP 6 ESKIP SKIP6 ESKIP SKIP6 5 -MIT2 SKIP5 SKIP5 4 +MIT2 SKIP4 SKIP4 3 -MIT1 SKIP3 SKIP3 2 +MIT1 SKIP2 ZAE SKIP2 1 ZAE SKIP8 YAE SKIP8 0 XAE SKIP7 XAE SKIP7
SKIP
X0005 X0006 X0007 X0008 X0009
*ESP *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in the lower row are for the M series.
- 170 -
B-63943EN/03
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004 X0004 X0005 X0006 X0007 X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0014 X0015 X0016 (for 1st MPG) X0017 (for 2nd MPG) X0018 (for 3rd MPG) X0019 (DO alarm detection) SKIPn and other fixed signals
Basic module
Extension module 1
*ESP fixed signal *DECn fixed signal
Extension module 2
Extension module 3
Extension module 1
The minimum configuration consists of the basic module and extension module 1. Extension modules 2 and 3 may be added as required. This allows fixed signals, such as SKIPn and *DECn, to always be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to an address for which the common voltage is fixed to 24 V. Also, with the Series 30i, the MPG interface provided by extension module 1 can always be used.
Basic module
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0007 X0007 X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0011 X0013 X0012 X0015 X0016 X0017 X0018 X0019 (for 1st MPG) X0020 (for 2nd MPG) X0021 (for 3rd MPG) X0022 (DO alarm detection)
Basic module
*ESP fixed signal *DECn fixed signal
Extension module 1
Extension module 2
Extension module 3
Extension module 1
The minimum configuration consists of the basic module only. Extension modules 1, 2, and 3 may be added as required. In the minimum configuration, SKIP and other fixed signals and the MGP interface of extension module 1 cannot be used. In this case, however, the *DECn fixed signal can always be used and the *ESP fixed signal can be allocated to an address for which the common voltage is fixed to 24 V in the minimum configuration.
Basic module
DO (output signal) alarm detection The DO driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B is capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. That is, if load current increases abnormally because, for example, a cable is connected to ground, or if the DO driver is heated abnormally for some reason or other, the protection circuit in the DO unit (one byte unit) operates, and continues turning DO signals off until the factor is removed and input is turned off, or until the power is turned off. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifies the DO driver which has detected the alarm. The following table shows the correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value "1" indicates that the corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder. This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection address and bit Xm+15.0 Xm+15.1 Xm+15.2 Xm+15.3 DO address Yn+0 Yn+1 Yn+2 Yn+3 Location Basic module Basic module Extension module 1 Extension module 1
- 171 -

Alarm detection address and bit Xm+15.4 Xm+15.5 Xm+15.6 Xm+15.7 DO address Yn+4 Yn+5 Yn+6 Yn+7 Location
B-63943EN/03
Extension module 2 Extension module 2 Extension module 3 Extension module 3
NOTE This function is not supported by the 2A output module or analog input module.
Allocation of the 2A output module and analog input module The 2A output module and analog input module can be allocated to any of the spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. In addition, up to three 2A output modules or analog input modules can be allocated to all the spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. When an MPG interface is required, the module occupies the space for expansion module 1; no 2A output module or analog input module can be allocated in the space for expansion module 1. The 2A output module does not involve DI points, so that the DI area of the space in which a 2A output module is allocated is unusable. When a 2A output module is allocated to the space for expansion module 2, for example, the areas from Xm+6 to Xm+8 cannot be used. (The spaces for the other modules are not shifted. In this case, the DI space of expansion module 3 remains at Xm+9 through Xm+11.)
8.4.20
Distribution I/O Setting
By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the expansion modules, connections can be made by omitting some expansion modules as shown below.
Method of setting (control and method of setting the control) As shown below, the control (rotary switch) is located on an expansion module. To change the setting, turn the switch with a flat-bladed screwdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm.
- 172 -
B-63943EN/03
The function of the rotary switch is as follows:

Setting position 0 1 2 3 4 to F Actual indication 0 2 4, -, 6, -, 8, -, A, -, C, -, E, -, Meaning of setting This is the standard setting. The rotary switch is factory-set to this position. This setting is used when no expansion module is omitted. Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to this position when the preceding expansion module is omitted. Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to this position when the preceding two expansion modules are omitted. This setting is prohibited. 4, 8, or C has the same effect as 0. 5, 9, or D has the same effect as 1. 6, A, or E has the same effect as 2. 7, B, or F has the same effect as 3. (This setting, however, is prohibited.)
- 173 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 Expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with manual pulse interface) (A03B-0815-C002) is fitted with an additional rotary switch as other types of modules are modified. However, expansion module A is always mounted at the location of expansion module 1, so that its factory setting need not be changed. 2 This feature was added in the middle. The expansion modules shipped before August 1998 are not provided with this feature.
- 174 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5
8.5.1
CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT)

Overall Connection Diagram
JD51A
NOTE The following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the main board of control unit, cannot be used to connect the I/O Link or manual pulse generator.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification Connector case Connector case and connector FI-20-CV7 FI30-20S-CV7 Manufacturer Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
- 175 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5.2
Power Connection
Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power necessary for printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation. To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use CPD1 (OUT). Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.
CPD1(IN) 01 24 V power 02 03 CPD1(OUT) 01 24 V power 02 03 +24V 0V +24V 0V
Recommended cable-side connector: A02B-0120-K324 (including the following connector housing and case) (Housing: Japan AMP 1-178288-3) (Contacts: Japan AMP 1-175218-5)
NOTE The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are no indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish between the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the +24 V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off the +24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm. When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned on before or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
- 176 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5.3
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement
NOTE An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54 (B02) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
- 177 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5.4
DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection
- 178 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the connection of the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the 0 V power supply is recommended whereever possible. For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7. See "Address allocation" in Section 8.5.10 for details of how to allocate the emergency stop signal. For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7), the logic is fixed to "0". For unused pins allocated to Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed to "0" when the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is connected to the 0 V power supply. When the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to "1". The logic of the unused pins allocated to Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 is variable when the contact of the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is open. 2 An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54 (B02) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
8.5.5
DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection
A maximum of 56 points are provided.
NOTE 1 Detour prevention diodes must be incorporated for matrix signal input, as shown in the following figure. Otherwise, only two signals can be input at the same time. Inputting three or more signals simultaneously without using detour prevention diodes may result in data input errors.
- 179 -
8.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link NOTE 2 Use the cables for matrix input signals within a range of 150 mm.
B-63943EN/03
*KCMn
*KYDn
- 180 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5.6
A maximum of 56 points are provided.
- 181 -
B-63943EN/03
- 182 -
B-63943EN/03
- 183 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5.7
For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section 8.4.15.
- 184 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5.8
External View
5-3.2 65
95
95
24 V power supply connection Manual pulse generator connection I/O Link signal connection Operator's panel DI/DO interface
Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that printed circuit boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent interference. : Polarity guide : A1 pin mark
Rear mounting area (Perspective drawing viewed from the front)
- 185 -
B-63943EN/03
8.5.9
Specifications
During operation 0C to 58C During storage and transportation -20C to 60C Max. 1.1C/min. Normal : 75% or less Short term (1 month or less) : 95% or less During operation : 0.5 G or less Ordinary machining factory environment (Special consideration is required when installing the module in a dusty location or where highly concentrated cutting lubricant or organic solvent is used.) (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Installation specifications
Ambient temperature for the unit Temperature change Relative humidity Vibration Environment Other requirements
Ordering specifications
Item Operator's panel I/O module Fuse (replacement part) Specification A20B-2002-0470 A03B-0815-K001 Remarks General-purpose DI: 16 points Matrix DI: 56 points DO: 56 points MPG interface is supported. 1A
Module specifications
Item General-purpose DI Matrix DI DO points CNC interface MPG interface Specification 16 points 56 points (8 7) 56 points FANUC I/O Link connection Max. 3 units Remarks 24-V input 5-V input 24 V source type output Up to 16 modules can be connected as CNC slaves. Or, a maximum of 10241/024 points can be supported on both the input and output sides. MPG interface can be used only for the Series 30i.
Power supply rating

Module Supply voltage 24 VDC 10% supplied from the power supply connector CPD1. The allowance of 10% should include instantaneous voltage and ripple voltage. Current rating Remarks The total power consumption of DI points is included. (This is true when all general-purpose DI points are turned on.) The power consumption of DO points is not included.
Operator's panel I/O module
0.35A
DI (input signal) specifications (General-purpose input signal)

Contact rating Open circuit intercontact leakage current Closed circuit intercontact voltage drop Delay 30 VDC, 16 mA or more 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V) 2 V or less (including cable voltage drop) Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms The time required for I/O Link transmission between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into account.
- 186 -
B-63943EN/03

6 VDC, 2 mA or more 0.2 mA or less (at 26 V) 0.9 V or less (with a current of 1 mA) The maximum matrix period of 16 ms, the maximum time of I/O Link transfer between CNC and I/O module of 2 ms, and the ladder scanning period (by CNC) must be considered.
(Matrix input signal)

Contact rating Open circuit intercontact leakage current Closed circuit intercontact voltage drop Delay
NOTE When detour prevention diodes are used, the voltage drop across closed contacts indicated above must be maintained, including the diode voltage drop.
DO (output signal) specifications
Maximum load current in ON state Saturation voltage in ON state Withstand voltage Leakage current in OFF state Delay 200 mA or less (including momentary current) Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA) 24 V +20% or less (including momentary values) 20 A or less Driver delay: Max. 50 s The time required for I/O Link transmission between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into account.
NOTE Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DO power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
8.5.10
Other Notes

- 187 -
B-63943EN/03
Address allocation
For the operator's panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map Xm Xm+1 Xm+2 Xm+3 Xm+4 Xm+5 Xm+6 Xm+7 Xm+8 Xm+9 Xm+10 Xm+11 Xm+12 (for 1st MPG) Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG) Xm+15 (DO alarm detection) General-purpose input signal Reserved Yn Yn+1 Yn+2 Yn+3 Yn+4 Yn+5 Yn+6 Yn+7 DO space map
Output signal
Matrix input signal
Reserved
Reserved MPG (DO alarm detection)
The operator's panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). This address allocation is explained below. The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG. Therefore, when using an MPG for the I series CNC, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly. DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating alarms that may occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used. Therefore, when using this area, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes. Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the operator's panel I/O module freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the fixed addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the following in mind. Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for Series 30i)
7 SKIP X0004 X0005 X0006 X0007 X0008 X0009 SKIP 6 ESKIP SKIP6 ESKIP SKIP6 5 -MIT2 SKIP5 SKIP5 4 +MIT2 SKIP4 SKIP4 3 -MIT1 SKIP3 SKIP3 2 +MIT1 SKIP2 ZAE SKIP2 1 ZAE SKIP8 YAE SKIP8 0 XAE SKIP7 XAE SKIP7
- 188 -
B-63943EN/03
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0008 X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0014 X0015 X0016 X0017 X0018 X0019 X0020 (for 1st MPG) X0021 (for 2nd MPG) X0022 (for 3rd MPG) X0023 (DO alarm detection) General-purpose input signal Reserved *ESP fixed signal *DECn fixed signal
Matrix input signal
Reserved MPG DO alarm detection
Although fixed signals such as SKIP cannot be used, allocating DI addresses starting from X0008 allows the *DECn signal to be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to an address for which the common voltage is fixed to 24 V. (Fixed signals cannot be allocated to the for the matrix input signals.)
Turning the DO (output signal) power on and off (DOCOM) All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off (opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin "DOCOM". Doing so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
DOCOM When DO is ON in the sequence When DO is OFF in the sequence ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
NOTE When the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, the ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state of the signal, as indicated by the dotted lines in the above figure. Do not turn off the +24 V supply, provided by the CPD1 to the I/O module, during the operation. Turning off the +24 V supply would cause a CNC communication alarm. When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned on before or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200 mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at the same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when two DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubles while they are off (max. 40 A).
- 189 -
B-63943EN/03
DOCOM
CE53(A25), (B25) CE54(B24), (A25), (B25)
+24V 0V +24 stabilized power supply
Relay DV
DV
DO (output signal) alarm detection The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. That is, if load current increases abnormally because, for example, a cable is connected to ground, or if the DO driver is heated abnormally for some reason or other, the protection circuit in the DO unit (one byte unit) operates, AND CONTINUES TURNING DO SIGNALS OFF UNTIL THE FACTOR IS REMOVED AND INPUT IS TURNED OFF, OR UNTIL THE POWER IS TURNED OFF. Even if this occurs, the CNC and the I/O module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifies which DO driver has detected an alarm. The following table shows the correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value "1" indicates that the corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing the alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder. This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection address and bit Xm+15.0 Xm+15.1 Xm+15.2 Xm+15.3 Xm+15.4 Xm+15.5 Xm+15.6 Xm+15.7 DO address Yn+0 Yn+1 Yn+2 Yn+3 Yn+4 Yn+5 Yn+6 Yn+7 Remarks
Reserved
- 190 -
B-63943EN/03
8.6
CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE AND POWER MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE
The difference between the operator's panel I/O module and the power magnetics cabinet I/O module lies in whether an interface to a manual pulse generator is provided. The power magnetics cabinet does not provide an interface to a manual pulse generator.
8.6.1
Overall Connection Diagram
JD51A
NOTE The following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the main board of control unit, cannot be used to connect the I/O Link or manual pulse generator.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification Connector case Connector case and connector FI-20-CV7 FI30-20S-CV7 Manufacturer Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
- 191 -
B-63943EN/03
8.6.2
Power Connection
Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the power necessary for the printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation. To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactly as it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, use CPD1 (OUT). Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.
DOCOM 24 V power supply
CPD1(IN) 01 02 03 CPD1(OUT) +24V 0V
24 V power supply
01 02 03
+24V 0V
Recommended cable-side connector: A02B-0120-K324 (including the following connector housing and case) (Housing: Japan AMP 1-178288-3) (Contacts: Japan AMP 1-175218-5)
NOTE The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are no indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish between the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the +24 V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off the +24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm. When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned on before or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
- 192 -
B-63943EN/03
8.6.3
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement
NOTE An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and CE57 (B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
- 193 -
B-63943EN/03
8.6.4
DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection
- 194 -
B-63943EN/03
- 195 -
B-63943EN/03
- 196 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 through Xm+5.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, the connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0 V power supply is recommended whereever possible. For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed. See "Address allocation" in Section 8.6.9 for details of how to allocate the emergency stop signal. For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, the logic is fixed to "0". For unused pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage can be selected, the logic is fixed to "0" when the DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is connected to the 0 V power supply. When the DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to "1". The logic of the unused pins is variable when the contacts of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins are open. 2 An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and CE57 (B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
- 197 -
B-63943EN/03
8.6.5
- 198 -
B-63943EN/03
8.6.6
For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section 8.4.15.
- 199 -
B-63943EN/03
8.6.7
External View
5-3.2 65
95
24 V power supply connection
Manual pulse generator connection I/O Link signal connection Operator's panel DI/DO interface 24-V power supply
Note)
Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuit boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent interference.
: Polarity guide : A1 pin mark
Rear mounting area (Perspective drawing viewed from the front)
- 200 -
95
B-63943EN/03
8.6.8
Specifications
During operation 0C to 58C During storage and transportation -20C to 60C Max. 1.1C/min. Normal: 75% or less Short term (1 month or less): 95% or less During operation: 0.5 G or less Ordinary machining factory environment (Special consideration is required when installing the module in a dusty place or where highly concentrated cutting lubricant or organic solvent is used.) (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Installation specifications
Ambient temperature for the unit Temperature change Relative humidity Vibration Environment Other requirements
Ordering specifications
Item Operator's panel I/O module (with MPG interface) Power magnetics panel I/O module (without MPG interface) Fuse (replacement part) Specification A20B-2002-0520 Remarks DI: 48 points DO: 32 points MPG interface is supported. DI: 48 points DO: 32 points MPG interface is not supported. 1A
A20B-2002-0521
A03B-0815-K001
Module specifications
Item DI points DO points CNC interface Specification 48 points 32 points FANUC I/O Link connection Max. 3 units Remarks 24 V input 24 V source type output Up to 16 modules can be connected as CNC slaves. Or, a maximum of 1024 points can be supported on both the input and output sides. MPG interface can be used only for the Series 30i.
MPG interface
Power supply rating

Module Operator's panel I/O module and power magnetics panel I/O module Supply voltage 24 VDC 10% is supplied from power supply connector CPD1. The tolerance of 10% includes momentary and ripple currents. Power supply rating 0.3 A+7.3 mADI Remarks DI = number of DI points in the ON state
DI (input signal) specifications (general-purpose input signal)

Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more Open circuit intercontact leakage 1 mA or less (at 26.4 V) current Closed circuit intercontact 2 V or less (including cable voltage drop) voltage drop Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms Delay The time required for I/O Link transmission between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into account.
- 201 -

DO (output signal) specifications
Maximum load current in ON state Saturation voltage in ON state Withstand voltage Leakage current in OFF state Delay
B-63943EN/03
200 mA or less (including momentary current) Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA) 24 V +20% or less (including momentary values) 20 A or less Driver delay: Max. 50 s The time for I/O Link transmission between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into account.
NOTE Ensure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DO power supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
8.6.9
Other Notes

Address allocation
For the operator's panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
DI space map Xm Xm+1 Xm+2 Xm+3 Xm+4 Xm+5 Xm+6 Xm+7 Xm+8 Xm+9 Xm+10 Xm+11 Xm+12 (for 1st MPG) Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG) Xm+15 (DO alarm detection) Input signal Yn Yn+1 Yn+2 Yn+3 DO space map
Output signal
Not used
MPG
DO alarm detection
Basically, this 48/32-point I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (4 bytes). This address allocation is explained below. The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG. Therefore, when using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly. DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheating alarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see the section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] This address is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used. When using this area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
- 202 -
B-63943EN/03
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the 48/32-point I/O module freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the fixed addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the following in mind. Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for Series 30i)
7 SKIP X0004 X0005 X0006 X0007 X0008 X0009 SKIP 6 ESKIP SKIP6 ESKIP SKIP6 5 -MIT2 SKIP5 SKIP5 4 +MIT2 SKIP4 SKIP4 3 -MIT1 SKIP3 SKIP3 2 +MIT1 SKIP2 ZAE SKIP2 1 ZAE SKIP8 YAE SKIP8 0 XAE SKIP7 XAE SKIP7
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004 X0004 X0005 X0006 X0007 X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0014 X0015 X0016 (for 1st MPG) X0017 (for 2nd MPG) X0018 (for 3rd MPG) X0019 (DO alarm detection) Input signal
*ESP fixed signal *DECn fixed signal Not used
MPG DO alarm detection
Allocating DI addresses from X0004 allows the fixed signals, such as SKIP and *DECn, to be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated to an address for which the common voltage in fixed to 24 V.
Turning the DO (output signal) power on and off (DOCOM) All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off (opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin "DOCOM". Doing so causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
DOCOM When DO is ON in the sequence When DO is OFF in the sequence ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
- 203 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE When the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, the ON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state of the signal, as shown within dotted lines in the above figure. Do not turn off the +24 V supply provided by the CPD1 to the I/O module during the operation. Turning off the +24 V supply causes a CNC communication alarm. When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned on before or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after or at the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, as shown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200 mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at the same time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when two DO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubles when they are off (max. 40 A).
CE56(A24, B24, A25, B25) CE57(A24, B24, A25, B25)
DOCOM
+24V 0V +24 stabilized power supply
Relay DV
DV
DO (output signal) alarm detection The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. That is, if load current increases abnormally because, for example, a cable is connected to ground, or if the DO driver is heated abnormally for some reason or other, the protection circuit in the DO unit (one byte unit) operates, AND CONTINUES TURNING DO SIGNALS OFF UNTIL THE FACTOR IS REMOVED AND INPUT IS TURNED OFF, OR UNTIL THE POWER IS TURNED OFF. Even if this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifies the DO driver which has detected the alarm. The following table shows the correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value "1" indicates that the corresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder. This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection address and bit Xm+15.0 Xm+15.1 Xm+15.2 Xm+15.3 DO address Yn+0 Yn+1 Yn+2 Yn+3 Remarks
- 204 -
B-63943EN/03

DO address Yn+4 Yn+5 Yn+6 Yn+7 Remarks Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Xm+15.4 Xm+15.5 Xm+15.6 Xm+15.7
Alarm detection address and bit
8.7
8.7.1
FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT

Overview
This unit connects FANUC I/O Link master devices' such as the CNC, via an I/O Link to enable the transfer of DI/DO signals.
System A CNC +24 V power supply System B +24 V power supply CNC
I/O Link SLAVE
I/O Link SLAVE
FANUC I/O Link FANUC I/O Link connection unit jbg DI DO DO DI
I/O Link MASTER : Series 30i, etc. I/O Link SLAVE : I/O Unit, Power Mate, Series 0-C, etc. : FANUC I/O Link
Fig. 8.7.1 System which uses FANUC I/O Link connection units
This unit enables I/O data transfer between two independent FANUC I/O Link masters. When the system is adjusted or maintained, this unit also allows one FANUC I/O Link to operate with the power to the line system of the other FANUC I/O Link off, that is, with link operation stopped.
NOTE Note the following when designing the system: 1 If the power to the system is turned off for maintenance or adjustment or link operation is stopped due to a failure in the host CNC or a slave unit for either of the FANUC I/O Link lines, this connection unit is designed so that it sets DI data sent from the stopped system to all 0 and transfers it. 2 While the two I/O Link lines are communicating with each other normally, if the link operation of either line stops or is stopped, it takes several tens to hundreds of milliseconds for the function in 1 to take effect. During this period, that data which exists immediately before the line stops is transferred.
- 205 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 3 It cannot be guaranteed that the operations described in 1 and 2 are carried out that way. Therefore, manage the signals related to safety by making a safety circuit outside of the this FANUC I/O Link connection unit.
8.7.2
Specification
Item Specification
Provided with two slave mode I/O Link interface channels, between which DI/DO data can be transferred. [Interface types] Electrical - optical Electrical - electrical Optical - optical
I/O Link function
One of the following combinations is selected:
Number of DI/DO data items Power supply
External dimensions
Installation Operating environment
DI: Up to 256, DO: Up to 256 (The number of data items actually used varies depending on the amount of data assigned in the host.) Each I/O Link interface must be independently supplied with +24 VDC. Voltage: +24 VDC +10%, -15% Current: 0.2 A (excluding surge) If a master unit does not have sufficient capacity to supply power to each unit (0.2 A per slot), use an external power supply unit. The power supply must be switched on, either simultaneously with or before, the I/O Link master. The two systems can be switched on and off independently of each other. Data from a system to which no power is supplied appears as zeros when viewed from the other system. The data becomes 0 within 200 ms of the power being switched off. 180 mm (width) 150 mm (height) about 50 mm (depth) W H D Fig. 8.7.2 (b) is an outline drawing of the unit. The unit, which is a stand-alone type, is installed in the power magnetics cabinet. Fig. 8.7.2 (c) shows how to mount the unit. Temperature : 0 to 60C Humidity : 5 to 75% RH (non-condensing) Vibration : 0.5 G or less
Ordering information
Interface type Electrical-optical interface Electrical-electrical interface Optical-optical interface Specification A20B-20000410 A20B-2000-0411 A20B-20000412
- 206 -
B-63943EN/03
LED indications
LED5 (GREEN) LED3 (RED) LED4 (GREEN) LED2 (RED)
DC-DC CONVERTER CP2 +5V CP1
LED1 (RED)
0V
: Check pin
Fig. 8.7.2 (a) LED locations LED status 1 2 LED1 LED1 LED4 LED2 LED4 LED2 LED4 LED2 3 LED5 LED3 LED5 LED3 LED5 LED3 Description Normal A RAM parity error occurred because of a hardware failure. CP1 is supplied with the specified voltage. (Pilot lamp) CP1 is supplied with a voltage that is lower than specified or zero. A communication error occurred in a channel of CP1. CP2 is supplied with the specified voltage. (Pilot lamp) CP2 is supplied with a voltage that is lower than specified or zero. A communication error occurred in a channel of CP2.
: On
: Off
- 207 -

180 10 160 10
B-63943EN/03
Unit: mm
30
90
Printed-circuit board 150 Mounted components Cable 50 or less
Cable
30
Fig. 8.7.2 (b) Outline drawing
160
4-M4
Unit: mm
90
Fig. 8.7.2 (c) Mounting location
- 208 -
B-63943EN/03
8.7.3
8.7.3.1
Connection I/O Link interface

AC power input AC power input
(1) Connection diagram (example)
I/O Link master JD1A (JD44A)
External power (+24 V) <3> <1> <3>
External power (+24 V) <1>
I/O Link master JD1A (JD44A)
Optical I/O Link adapter CP* Electrical interface JD1B* CP* Optical interface COPB* <2>
JD1A* <1>
COPA* <2>
FANUC I/O Link connection unit (for electrical-optical interface) (*) <1> : Signal cable (electrical) <2> : Signal cable (optical) <3> : Power supply cable 1 or 2 (channel No.)
Additionally, the FANUC I/O Link connection unit frame must be grounded.
[Name of I/O Link connection unit connectors]

Electrical-optical Connector name I/O Link interface Channel 1 Channel 2 JD1A1 COPA2 JD1B1 COPB2 CP1 CP2 Electrical-electrical Connector name I/O Link interface Channel 1 Channel 2 JD1A1 JD1A2 JD1B1 JD1B2 CP1 CP2 Optical-optical Connector name I/O Link interface Channel 1 Channel 2 COPA1 COPA2 COPB COPB2 CP1 CP2
- 209 -

(2) Signal cable (electrical)
B-63943EN/03
This unit (JD1A1/JD1A2) Another device (JD1B) or Another device (JD1A) This unit (JD1B1/JD1B2)
(3) Signal cable (optical) Optical cable specification : A66L-6001-0026#XXXX (where XXXX is a cable length specification) Cable specification examples 10m - L10R03 100 - L100R3 Cable length : 200 m (maximum)
- 210 -
B-63943EN/03

CP1/CP2 connector 1 2 +24V 0V +24V 0V
(4) Power supply cable

3 (Input) (Output)
Y X
24 VDC is supplied via a Y-connector. Provided the power supply has sufficient capacity, power can be supplied to another device with the X-side as output. Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2. Cable-side connector specification Y-connector : A63L-0001-0460#3LKY (AMP Japan, 2-178288-3) X-connector : A63L-0001-0460#3LKX (AMP Japan, 1-178288-3) Contact: A63L-0001-0456#BS (AMP Japan, 175218-5) Ordering information: Y + 3 contacts : A02B-0120-K323 X + 3 contacts : A02B-0120-K324 Cable material : Vinyl-insulated electrical wire AWG20-16 Cable length : Determine the length of the cable such that the supplied voltage at the receiving end satisfies the requirements, because the voltage may fluctuate and drop as a result of the resistance of the cable conductor. (5) Frame grounding Ground the frame of the unit using a wire having a cross section of at least 5.5 m2 (class 3 or higher). An M4 frame ground terminal is provided.
8.8
8.8.1
CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT SERIES WITH I/O LINK

Overview
The FANUC servo unit series with I/O Link (called the amplifier with I/O Link) is a power mate CNC control servo unit that can be easily connected to a CNC control unit via the FANUC I/O Link. The amplifier with I/O Link can be connected to the 30i series using the FANUC I/O Link.
NOTE Using the amplifier requires that the power mate CNC manager software function be installed. This function is included as one of the 30i series option functions.
- 211 -
B-63943EN/03
8.8.2
Connection
The amplifier with I/O Link is connected to the Series 30i using the usual FANUC I/O Link connection.
This figure is an example of connecting to a LCD-mounted type 30i series.
8.8.3
Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected
The maximum number of amplifiers with I/O Link that can be connected to a control unit depends on the maximum number of FANUC I/O Link points provided by that control unit, as well as their assignments. For the Series 30i, the maximum number of FANUC I/O Link DI and DO points are 1024 and 1024, respectively. One amplifier with I/O Link occupies 128 DI/DO points in the FANUC I/O Link. If no units other than the amplifiers with I/O Link are connected to the control unit, up to eight amplifiers can be connected.
8.8.4
Address Assignment by Ladder
If the amplifier with I/O Link is used as an I/O Link slave, I/O addresses are assigned in the PMC in the CNC. Because data output from the slave is made in 16-byte units, the number of input/output points must be set to 128. The module names are OC02I (input) and OC02O (output). The BASE is always 0, and the SLOT is 1.
- 212 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9
8.9.1
CONNECTION TO ATANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL

Overview
Standard machine operator's panel is connected with 30i series by I/O Link, which is composed by some following operator's panels. Main panel All key tops are detachable. MTB can customize keys and make his original key layout easily. Sub panel A, D This operator's panel has power ON/OFF, emergency stop, program protect, and two rotary switches.
- 213 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.2
Total Connection Diagram

CNC Standard MDI Unit CNK2 CNK1
MDI(CA55)
Main panel Machine operator's section CM68 JD1B CM69 JD1A General-purpose DI/DO
I/O Link(JD1A) (JD44A) (JD51A)
JA3
Next I/O unit
MPG MPG MPG Pendant type MPG Sub panel A or D
+24V Power +24V Power
CyA6yy4(IN)
JA58
CA64(OUT) CM65 CM66
(SA1) (SA2) (SA3,SB1 to 3)
Power magnetics cabinet
CA65
CM67
NOTE Manual pulse generators cannot be connected to JA3 and JA58 simultaneously.
- 214 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.3
8.9.3.1
Each Connections Pin assignment
NOTE Input/output Pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one in each pair is usable. are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the same name Pins shaded by are connected directly to one another.
- 215 -
B-63943EN/03
Recommended connector for cable of JA3 and JA58 When the depth of the operator's panel is 60mm min. Hirose electric :FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV7 (Case) When the depth of the operator's panel is 80mm min. Recommended connector for cable of JA3: Hirose electric : FI40B-2015S (Connector), FI-20-CV (Case) Recommended connector for cable of JA58: Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector), PCR-V20LA (Case) Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV2 (Case) Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector), FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case) Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector), 52624-2015 (Case)
8.9.3.2
Power supply connection
The power required for the operation of this operator's panel and for a general DI must be supplied to connector CA64 (IN) in the following figure. Since the power input from CA64 (IN) is output to CA64 (OUT) for easy branching, use the power from CA64 (OUT) when the power must be branched.
CA64(IN) 01 +24V 02 0V 03 CA64(OUT) 01 +24V 02 0V 03
24VDC power
24VDC power
NOTE 1 Both connectors CA64(IN) and CA64(OUT) are same specification. And there is not indication of (IN) and (OUT) on the PCB. 2 Power supply for the operator's panel must not turn off at operation. If +24V is turned off at operation, CNC happen to get system alarm(Communication alarm between CNC and operator's panel). +24V for operator's panel must be supplied before or same time CNC power on.
- 216 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.3.3
I/O link connection

Control unit preceding slave unit
Main panel
Next slave unit
Recommended connector for cable of JD1A and JD1B on Main panel When the depth of the operator's panel is 60mm min. Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV7 (Case) When the depth of the operator's panel is 80mm min. Honda : PCR-E20FA (Connector), PCR-V20LA (Case) Hirose electric : FI30-20S (Connector), FI-20-CV2 (Case) Fujitsu : FCN-247J020-G/E (Connector), FCN-240C020-Y/S (Case) Molex : 52622-2011 (Connector), 52624-2015 (Case)
+5V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not necessary when connecting with a metal cable. A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link Adapter is not used.
Shield Ground plate Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#AWG28 10 pairs)
- 217 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.3.4
Emergency stop signal connection
A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the standard machine operator's panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet. (This signal cannot be sent to the FANUC I/O Link.) When MTB uses the Sub panel A/D, wiring to the emergency stop switch is contained in the Sub panel A/D.
Machine operator's panel Sub panel A/D Emergency stop switch (SB1) *ESP (2a2b) Main panel P.C.B. CM67 A04 CA65 A03 *ESP Power magnetics cabinet
*ESP
ESPCM1
B04
B03
ESPCM1
+24V
8.9.3.5
Power ON/OFF control signal connection
Signal generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the standard machine operator's panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet. (This signal cannot be sent to the FANUC I/O Link.) When MTB uses the Sub panel A/D, wiring to the ON/OFF control switches are contained in the Sub panel A/D.
Machine operator's panel Sub panel A/D ON switch (SB2) EON Main panel P.C.B. CM67 A01 CA65 A01 EON Power magnetics cabinet
COM1 OFF switch (SB3) EOFF
A02
A02
COM
B01
B01
EOFF
COM2
B02
B02
- 218 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.3.6
General-purpose DI signal connection
NOTE Connection of Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.4 shows when the Sub panel A/D is used.
- 219 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 Xm+3.0 to 3.7 have a common line that is possible to select the source/sink type. If DICOM (CM69-B06pin) is connected to +24V, the DI signal logic is negative. But in this connection, if the DI signal wires happen to drop the ground level, the status of the DI signal is same as the DI signal is "ON". From the safety viewpoint, DICOM should be connected 0V. 2 From the safety viewpoint, Emergency Stop signal must be assigned on the address Xm+0.0 to 0.7 or Xm+1.0 to 1.7 or Xm+2.0 to 2.7. As refer to the 5. DI/DO mapping, assign the Emergency stop DI. 3 Xm+0.0 to 0.7, Xm+1.0 to 1.7 and Xm+2.0 to 0.7 common lines are fixed. So, if these DI pins in this address open, the status of these one stay "0". And in case of Xm+3.0 to 3.7 which have a selectable common line, if the DICOM (CM69-B06pin) is connected to 0V and these DI pins open, the status of these one stay "0". And if the DICOM are connected to +24V and these DI pins open, the status of these one stay "1". And if the DICOM is not connected to 0V or +24V and these DI pins open, the status of these one don't care.
- 220 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.3.7
General-purpose DO signal connection
- 221 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.3.8
Manual pulse generator connection
When only the manual pulse generator.

The following figure shows an example in which three manual pulse generators are connected.
When the depth of the operator's panel is 80mm min. Recommended wire material : A66L-0001-0286(#20AWG 6+#24AWG 3 pairs) Recommended connector : A02B-0120-K303 (Including below connector and case) (Connector : HIROSE FI40B-2015S Soldering type) (Case : HIROSE FI-20-CV) Recommended cable : A02B-0120-K841(7m) (MPG 3 units) A02B-0120-K848(7m) (MPG 2 units) A02B-0120-K847(7m) (MPG 1 unit) (These cables don't include the wiring part in the figure.) When the depth of the operator's panel is 60mm min. Recommended wire material : A66L-0001-0284#10P(#28AWG 10pairs) Recommended connector : A02B-0236-K302 (Including below connector and case) (Connector : HIROSE FI30-20S Stand wire press-mount type) (Case : HIROSE FI-20-CV7)
NOTE Calculate the MPG cable max. Length as refer to the following calculation.
MPG needs a 5VDC power supply and the voltage must be less than 0.2V dropping. (the 0.2V dropping includes the resistance in the cable.)
0.2 0.1R2L m
0.1 : MPG power supply current 0.1A R : Resistance per wire length (/m) m : Wire Number (Both 0V and 5V)
- 222 -
B-63943EN/03
L : Cable length (m) Because

L M R
Example: In case of cable A66L-0001-0286 It has 3 pairs signal wires and 6 power line wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 /m). If the cable is used and each 3 wires are used for 0V and 5V power line, then max. cable length is as follows.
L 3 0.0394 =76.75(m)
The answer is 76.75m, if MPG unit is 1. (But FANUC decide any cable must be less than 50m.) The answer is 38.37m, if MPG units are 2. The answer is 25.58m, if MPG units are 3. And In case of cable A66L-0001-0284#10P The answer is 12.88m, if MPG units are 1. The answer is 6.44m, if MPG units are 2. The answer is 4.29m, if MPG units are 3. If the customer will use a some other vender's MPG ,not FANUC's MPG, the electrical condition must be as follows. HAn, HBn signals form MPG and CNC internal pulse are as follows. A cycle of the HA/HB pulse T1 must be more than 200 sec and 4/T1 must be more than 50 sec.
T1 HAn T1 4 T1 4 T1 T1 4
HBn
in the direction of + in the direction of Normal wheel Reverse wheel Click point Reverse wheel
The following shows a diagram of the circuit for receiving signals from the manual pulse generator:
Manual pulse generator +5V 10K Connector Filter
R +
0V
Internal receiver circuit
C 0V
Point of change in the signal input to the receiver (threshold)

- 223 -
B-63943EN/03
When the input signal state changes from the low level to high level, the signal level must rise to 3.7 V or higher. When the input signal state changes from the high level to low level, the signal level must fall to 1.5 V or lower.
When a pendant-type manual pulse generator
NOTE 1 When Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector JA58 are allocated as the DIs used for the axis selection and multiplier setting, Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector CM68 cannot be used. 2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side at the user's direction. When this is used, Yn+5.3 of CM68 cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
8.9.3.9
Connector (on the cable side) specifications

Connector Manufacture specification Stand wire press-mount type Soldering type Hirose FI30-20S (Connector) FI-20-CV7 (Case) Honda PCR-E20FS (Connector) PCR-V20LA (Case) Hirose FI40B-20S (Connector) FI-20-CV2 (Case) Honda PCR-E20FA (Connector) PCR-V20LA (Case) Hirose FI30-20S (Connector) FI-20-CV2 (Case) Hirose FI40B-2015S (Connector) FI-20-CV (Case) Order specification A02B-0236-K302
JD1A, JD1B, JA3, JA58 (Operators panel depth=60mm min.) JD1A, JD1B, JA58 (Operators panel depth=80mm min.)
A02B-0120-K301
Stand wire press-mount type
A02B-0120-K302
JA3 (Operators panel depth=80mm min.) CA64 (IN), CA64 (OUT)
Soldering type
A02B-0120-K303
AMP 1-178288-3 (Housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact)
A02B-0120-K324
- 224 -
B-63943EN/03

Connector Manufacture specification AMP 178289-5 (Housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) AMP 178289-8 (Housing) 1-175218-5 (Contact) Hirose HIF3BA-10D-2.54R Hirose HIF3BA-20D-2.54R JAV LY10-DC10 (Housing) LY10-C2-3 (Contact) Order specification A02B-0236-K312
CM67
CM68, CM69 CM65, CM66 CA65 CA55
A02B-0236-K313
A02B-0236-K314 A02B-0120-K343 A02B-0236-K303
8.9.4
8.9.4.1
I/O Address Keyboard of main panel
I/O address of Keyswitches and LED on the keyboard of Main panel are as follows.
BIT Key/LED Xm+4/Yn+0 Xm+5/Yn+1 Xm+6/Yn+2 Xm+7/Yn+3 Xm+8/Yn+4 Xm+9/Yn+5 Xm+10/Yn+6 Xm+11/Yn+7 7 B4 D4 A8 C8 E8 6 B3 D3 A7 C7 E7 B11 D11 5 B2 D2 A6 C6 E6 B10 D10 4 B1 D1 A5 C5 E5 B9 D9 3 A4 D4 E4 B8 D8 2 A3 C3 E3 B7 D7 A11 C11 E11 1 A2 C2 E2 B6 D6 A10 C10 E10 0 A1 C1 E1 B5 D5 A9 C9 E9
Keyswitches / LED position
Address
10
11
- 225 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.4.2
Override signals
Table of gray code output is as follows when the Sub panel A/D is used.
Rotary switch (SA1)

% Xm+0.0 Xm+0.1 Xm+0.2 Xm+0.3 Xm+0.4 Xm+0.5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 0 0 8 1 1 1 0 0 1 10 1 0 1 0 0 0 15 0 0 1 0 0 1 20 0 0 1 1 0 0 30 1 0 1 1 0 1 40 1 1 1 1 0 0 50 0 1 1 1 0 1 60 0 1 0 1 0 0 70 1 1 0 1 0 1 80 1 0 0 1 0 0 90 0 0 0 1 0 1 95 100 105 110 120 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
NOTE Xm+0.5 is a parity bit.
Rotary switch (SA2)

% Xm+0.6 Xm+0.7 Xm+1.0 Xm+1.1 Xm+1.2 Xm+1.3 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 1 0 0 0 1 0 70 1 1 0 0 0 0 80 0 1 0 0 1 0 90 0 1 1 0 0 0 100 1 1 1 0 1 0 110 1 0 1 0 0 0 120 0 0 1 0 1 0
NOTE Xm+1.2 is a parity bit.
8.9.5
I/O Mapping
I/O address map is as follows.
DI mapping should be assigned 1 group = 16 byte mapping and DO mapping should be assigned 1 group = 8 byte mapping. The reason is as follows.
- 226 -
B-63943EN/03
MPG interface(the counter for MPG) uses Xm+12 to Xm+14 area and it is fixed. And if MPG interface will be used, Xm+12 to Xm+14 area must be assigned. therefore, in case of 30i series and using MPG interface, DI mapping must be assigned 16 byte mapping. MPG counter area are directly processed by CNC software. So you must not use this area by customer ladder. When the MPG interface is not used, its DI area may be assigned to another I/O group. I/O mapping of the standard machine operator's panel can basically be assigned to any area of addresses. As for DI mapping, however, there are fixed signals directly monitored by the CNC. The fixed signals cannot be assigned to the keyswitch-input area. To use the fixed signals, therefore, assign them to an area other than the keyswitch-input area.
8.9.6
8.9.6.1
Outline Outline of main panel
Packing attachment area
- 227 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.6.2
Outline of sub panel A
- 228 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.6.3
Outline of sub panel D
- 229 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.6.4
Connector locations of main panel
- 230 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.7
8.9.7.1
Specifications Environmental requirement

At operation 0C to 58C Storing or transporting -20C to 60C Max. 1.1C/min Normally 75% or less (Relative humidity) Short time(Within one month) 95% or less (Relative humidity) Operating 0.5G or less Normal FA atmosphere (Consult us when using the system under environments with higher degree of dust, coolant, or organic solution.)
Temperature Around a unit Temperature variance Humidity Vibration Atmosphere
8.9.7.2
Order specification
Name Specification A02B-0303-C231 A02B-0303-C234 A02B-0236-C232 A02B-0236-C244 A02B-0236-K170 A02B-0236-K171 A02B-0236-K174 A02B-0815-K001 Remark Symbol key Symbol key, 3 point pushing measure
Standard machine operators panel Main panel Standard machine operators panel Sub panel A Standard machine operators panel Sub panel D Set of transparent key tops Set of blank key tops Set of symbol English key tops Fuse(Spare part)
55 key tops 55 key tops 34 labeled key tops + 21 blank key tops 1A
8.9.7.3
Main panel specification

Item Specification 32 points 8 points 65 keys 55 keys Color : Green Max. 3 units FANUC I/O Link connection Remark 24VDC type input 24VDC type output Full alphabet key (Main panel A/A1) Matrix DI Attached to all keyswitches, Matrix DO Only available for Series 30i. Max. 16 modules or total points max. 1024/1024 will be available.
General-purpose DI points General-purpose DO points Keyswitches of MDI Keyswitches of Machine operators panel LED MPG interface Interface to CNC
8.9.7.4
Sub panel A/D specification

Item Specification of Sub panel A 2 1 1 ON/OFF 2 1 1 ON/OFF Remark 5 bit Gray code output (with a parity bit) Number of Contact : 4 (contact a 2, contact b 2) M3.5 Screw
Override rotary switch Emergency stop switch Program protect key ON/OFF switch MPG
8.9.7.5
Power supply specification

Voltage Capacity 0.4A Remark Including all DI consumption
24VDC10% (from Power connector CA64, including momentary values)
- 231 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.7.6
General-purpose DI signal definition
Capacity 30VDC, 16mA or more Interconnect leakage 1mA or less(at 26.4V) current in closed circuit Interconnect voltage 2V or less(including the voltage drop in the cables) drop in closed circuit Receiver delay : Max. 2ms Delay time Need to consider about the serial communication (I/O Link) delay between CNC and operators panel 2ms(MAX)+Scan cycle of ladder (Scan cycle is different each CNCs).
8.9.7.7
General-purpose DO signal definition

200mA or less (including momentary values) Max. 1V (When load current is 200mA) 24V20% or less (including momentary values) 20A or less Driver delay : Max. 50s Need to consider about the serial communication (I/O Link) delay between CNC and operator's panel 2ms (MAX)+Scan cycle of ladder (Scan cycle is different each CNCs).
Maximum load current in ON state Saturation voltage in ON state Withstand voltage Leakage current in OFF state Delay time
8.9.8
8.9.8.1
Symbol
Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel Meaning of key symbols

English AUTO EDIT MDI REMOTE REF RETURN JOG INC JOG HANDLE TEACH SINGLE BLOCK BLOCK DELETE PRG STOP Meaning of key AUTO mode selection signal; Sets automatic operation mode. EDIT mode selection signal; Sets program edit operation mode. MDI mode selection; Sets MDI mode. DNC operation mode; Sets DNC operation mode. Reference position return mode selection; Sets reference position return mode. JOG feed mode selection; Sets jog feed mode. Step feed mode selection; Sets step feed mode. Manual handle feed mode selection; Sets manual handle feed mode. Teach-in jog (reach-in handle) mode selection signal; Sets teach-in jog (teach-in handle) mode. Single block signal; Executes program one by one. This key is used to check a program. Block delete; Skips the execution of the blocks d ending with the end of block (;) when this button is pressed during automatic operation. Program stop(output only); Turns on the LED on the button when automatic operation is stopped by M00 specified in the program.
- 232 -
B-63943EN/03

English OPT STOP RESTART Meaning of key Optional stop; Stops automatic operation after execution of the block of a program where M01 is specified in the program. Program restart; A program may be restart at a block by specifying the sequence number of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of a broken tool or for holidays. Dry run; Sets the axis feedrate to the jog feedrate instead of a programmed feedrate when automatic operation is performed by setting this button to on. This function is used to check only the movement of the tool when no workpiece is mounted. Machine lock; Updates only position display on the screen without making any axis movement, when automatic operation is performed by setting this button to on. This function is used to check a program. Cycle start; Start automatic operation. Cycle stop; Stops automatic operation. Manual handle feed magnification: Magnification for manual handle feed. Magnified by 1, 10, 100, 1000. Manual feed axis selection; Axes are selected, when these buttons are set to on in the jog feed mode or step feed mode. Manual feed operation; Performs movement along selected axes when these buttons are set on in the jog feed mode or step feed mode. TRVRS SPDL CW SPDL CCW SPDL STOP Traverse; Performs jog feed at rapid traverse rate when this button is set to on. Positive spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the positive direction. Negative spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the negative direction. Spindle stop; Stops the spindle motor rotation.
Symbol
DRY RUN MC LOCK CYCLE START CYCLE STOP
8.9.8.2
Detachable key top
Keyboard of machine operator's panel has 55 keys. All key tops are detachable. MTB can customize keys and make his original key layout easily. And using transparent key top (optional), a film sheet with marking is inserted into the key.
- 233 -
B-63943EN/03
Symbolic key top or Blank key top
Transparent key top
Film sheet (*) (12.5mm12.5mm, t=0.1mm Max.)
NOTE (*) Use the oil-proof sheet in the environment which oil is used for.
8.9.9
Others
The keyboard of this operator's panel is a matrix composition. When three or more keys are pushed, the bypass current cause unrelated key to be available. This malfunction can be prevented with ladder program. One example is shown as follows. For the main panel (A02B-0303-C234), measures against the malfunction have been implemented in the internal circuit, so measures by a ladder program are not required. (Elimination rule of malfunction) When three keyinputs or more is input, all the keyinput since the third is made invalid. However, when the number of all keyinput becomes two or less because keyinput was lost, all keyinputs are made effective.
- 234 -
B-63943EN/03
(Ladder operation) The following is an example ladder operation for the matrix DI consisting of 8 (bits) 8 (common) shown on the previous page. [1] The number of datalines where the keyinput exists is examined. Logical add R1 of the data of all addresses is calculated. The number of bits which are "1" in the 8bits data of R1 corresponds to the number of datalines where the keyinput exists. (1) When the data of R1 is corresponding to 00h, there is no bit which is "1" in the data of R1. Ex. State (a) : R1=(00000000) There is no dataline where input exists. (2) When the data of R1 is corresponding to the data in undermentioned datatable1., the number of bits which are "1" in the data of R1 is one. Similarly, when the data of R1 is corresponding to the data in datatable2., the number of bits which are "1" in the data of R1 is two. Ex. State (b) or (c) : R1 = (00000100) There is one dataline where input exists. Ex. State (d) or (e) : R1 = (00010100) There are two datalines where input exists. (3) If the data of R1 is not corresponding to 00h and the both datatables, the number of bits which are "1" in the data of R1 is three or more. Ex. State (f) : R1 = (00110100) There are three datalines where input exists.
- 235 -
B-63943EN/03
[2] Judgment 1 (1) If there is no dataline where the keyinput exists. Any key switch is not pushed. : Ex. State (a) (2) When the keyinput exists in two datalines or less. To [3] (3) When the keyinput exists in three data lines or more. There are three keyinputs or more. It is invalid keyinput. : Ex. State (f) [3] When the keyinput exists in two datalines or less, it is examined whether two or more keyinput exists on the same dataline. The data of all addresses is subtracted from logical add R1 and subtraction result R2 is obtained. There are no two or more keyinput on the same dataline if it is R2=00h. Ex. When there is one dataline where input exists. State (b) : R2 = FCh State (c) : R2 = F8h When there are two datalines where input exists. State (d) : R2 = 00h State (e) : R2 = FCh [4] Judgment 2 (1) In case of R2 = 00h There are two or less datalines where input exists, and there are no two or more keyinputs on the same dataline. In this case, the numbers of all keyinputs are one or two. It is effective keyinput. (2) In case of R2 00h There are two or less datalines where input exists, and two or more keyinputs exists on the same dataline. To [5]. : Ex. State (d) [5] Judgment 3 When there is one dataline where input exists To [6]. When there are two datalines where input exists There are three keyinputs or more. It is invalid keyinput. : Ex. State (e) [6] Subtraction result R2 is added to logical add R1. If this addition result is 00h, the number of all keyinputs is two. Ex. State (b) : R1 + R2 = 04h + FCh = 00h State (c) : R1 + R2 = 04h + F8h = FCh [7] Judgment 4 In case of R1 + R2 = 00h There is one dataline where input exists, and there are two keyinputs on this dataline.That is, because the numbers of all input are two keys, it is effective input. : Ex. State (b) In case of R1+R2 00h There are three keyinputs or more on the same dataline. It is invalid key input. : Ex. State (c) [8] Only when the keyinput becomes effective because of judgment 1-4, all DI data (Xm+4-Xm+11) is used by the ladder program.
- 236 -
B-63943EN/03
8.9.10
Fuse
Maintenance Parts
Name For Main panel Ordering code A60L-0001-0290#LM10 Remark Rated at 1A
Exhaustion parts
Repair parts
Name I/O board Main panel Sub panel A Sub panel D For Main panel Ordering code A20B-8002-0260 A02B-0303-C231 A02B-0303-C234 A02B-0236-C232 A02B-0236-C244 Remark
3 point pushing measure
8.9.11
Other Notes

- 237 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP
B-63943EN/03
9
9.1
STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP

STOP MODES
If the control unit enters the alarm state, the servo and spindle motors stop (Note).
NOTE A servo motor attached to a vertical axis or spindle which is not manufactured by FANUC may not stop. And, a stop of the spindle motor depends on a Ladder program.
There are the following stop modes: 1. Stop by shutting off the motor power 2. Controlled stop without shutting off the motor power 3. Stop by shutting off the motor power after a controlled stop A controlled stop is the quickest. However, a stop may be made by immediately shutting off the motor power for safety reasons.
WARNING Pressing the RESET key stops the running program. As a result, the servo axis stops and the spindle axis remains rotating without changing the speed. The RESET key may not function due to an MDI failure or the like, so, for safety, use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to stop the motor safely. When a failure of the control unit, machine contact, or connection is also assumed, further safety actions must be taken.
9.2
SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER
The motor power may be shut off through an IGBT (transistor) or an electromechanical scheme that controls mechanical contacts. When an amplifier is used, the motor power is shut off by an IGBT (transistor) based on the control unit alarm state (or Ladder program). To shut off the motor power through an electromechanical scheme, a line contactor must be installed on the power input line in the Power Supply, thereby providing a direct contactor shut-off route. (See Fig. 9.5 (a) in Section 9.5, "EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL.") The Power Supply provides MCC control signals (MCCOFF3 and MCCOFF4) for controlling the contactor. However, these signals are enabled only when the motor power to all servo and spindle amplifiers connected to the Common Power Supply is shut off through the IGBT. Example 1) When the *ESP signal is input to the Power Supply The motor power to both servo and spindle amplifiers is shut off by the IGBT, after which MCC control signals are output.
- 238 -
B-63943EN/03
Example 2) When a servo alarm occurs The motor power to the servo amplifier is shut off by the IGBT. When the spindle motor works without any trouble, however, the spindle motor can be controlled independently and the motor power to the spindle amplifier is not shut off by the IGBT. In this case, MCC control signals are not output. When a spindle emergency stop signal is input using the Ladder program, the spindle motor is decelerated to a stop. Then, the motor power is shut off through the IGBT, MCC control signals are output, and the motor power is shut off electromechanically. A failure in the amplifier may disable MCC control signals. To ensure motor power shut-off, therefore, a circuit must be designed in a redundancy configuration having a route that is independent of the shut-off function of the amplifier.
9.3
STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR
While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor power allows the spindle motor to coast at a speed maintained before shut-off and eventually stop (after a while). However, there may be cases where the spindle motor should be stopped as soon as possible for safety reasons. In such cases, a stop of the spindle motor depends on a Ladder program prepared by the machine tool builder. If the CNC detects an abnormal condition, it outputs an alarm to the PMC. The Ladder program should specify processing to be performed when an alarm is output: allowing the spindle motor to continue running, decelerating the spindle to a stop, or causing the spindle to coast, for example. To decelerate the spindle motor to a stop, a spindle emergency stop signal (such as *ESPA (G71.1) or *ESPB (G75.1)) can be input in the PMC. Inputting this signal cause the spindle motor to be decelerated to a stop. (A Ladder program must be created so that this signal is input if an alarm occurs.) The same effect can be achieved by using the Power Supply emergency stop input (connector CX4). When an emergency stop signal is connected to the *EMGPSM emergency stop input (connector CX4), therefore, the spindle is decelerated to a stop if the CNC enters the emergency stop state.
CAUTION 1 If the control unit enters the system alarm state, the Ladder program does not run. In this case, the spindle amplifier can be decelerated to a stop. Make proper parameter settings because such a stop depends on the settings. 2 If the spindle motor cannot be controlled due to an alarm in the spindle amplifier itself or for some other reason, the motor power is shut off by the IGBT immediately. After the servo motor has stopped, an MCC control signal is output.
9.4
STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR
Shutting off the motor power brings the servo motor to a dynamic brake stop. A dynamic brake stop is braking performed by separating the synchronous rotator from the driving power, and consuming generated electric energies with the coil as well as the built-in resistor of the servo amplifier. With this function, shutting off the motor power does not allow the servo motor to coast like the spindle motor. Servo motor stop mode depends on the type of a control unit alarm. Example) 1. PS alarm caused by an NC program error or the like The motor power is not shut off. 2. Control unit fan stop A single-block stop is made. The motor power is not shut off. 3. Emergency stop state A dynamic stop is made as a rule. By setting relevant parameters, however, it is also possible to decelerate the servo motor to a stop, and then to shut off the servo motor power.
- 239 -

4. System alarm A dynamic brake stop is made. If the servo motor cannot be controlled, a dynamic brake stop is unconditionally made.
B-63943EN/03
9.5
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

CAUTION The safety machine should be designed based on the evaluation results of machine risk assessment. Use the emergency stop signal properly in order to design the safety machine.
To configure an emergency stop circuit in compliance with the safety standards of IEC60204-1 in which requirements for electrical components of machines are specified, observe the following cautions. IEC60204-1 specifies that an emergency stop circuit shall function as a category 0 or 1 stop. Category 0 stop: Stopping by immediate removal of the power to the machine actuators (Uncontrolled stop) Category 1 stop: A controlled stop with the power to the machine actuators available to achieve the stop and then removal of the power when the stop is achieved (Controlled stop) Fig. 9.5(a) and Fig. 9.5(b) show examples of how to make connections for the emergency stop signal with this CNC controller and the servo amplifier (i series and i series) to comply with the EU Machine Instructions. Fig. 9.5(c) shows a flow diagram of the emergency stop circuit signals. The emergency stop signal is input to the safety relay module, from which the signal is input to the CNC controller and servo amplifier. The servo amplifier outputs a control signal for a motor power (magnetic contactor). This signal can be used to switch the motor power input to the servo amplifier on and off. For the emergency stop signal to be input to the safety relay module, the B contact of a pushbutton switch is usually used. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC controller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo and spindle motors can be controlled and operated. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC controller enters the emergency stop state, and the servo and spindle motors stop. In the examples of connections for the emergency stop signal shown in Fig. 9.5(a) and 9.5(b), the spindle motor power is shut off after the spindle motor is decelerated to a stop (Category 1 stop). Meanwhile, the servo motor is forced to be a dynamic stop as a rule (Category 0 stop). By setting the relevant parameter, however, it is also possible to decelerate the servo motor to a stop, and then to shut off the servo motor power (Category 1 stop). For details of how the spindle motor and the servo motor stop when the emergency stop button is pushed, see Section 9.3 and Section 9.4. For details of the parameters related to these matters, refer to the FANUC AC SERVO Parameter Manual (B-65270EN). The examples of the emergency stop circuits shown in Fig. 9.5(a) and Fig. 9.5(b) can comply with the requirements of the safety standard ISO13849-1, Performance Level (PL) c or d. However, the machine tool builder should obtain reliability data from parts suppliers and calculate specific values in compliance with the safety standard ISO13849-1. For information about FANUC-provided data required for calculation, please contact a FANUC sales office.
- 240 -
B-63943EN/03

Emergency stop button S1 Safety module Emergency stop K1
Safety input 2 Reset/ feedback input
relay
Safety input 1
Magnetic contactor K0
Ready
S2
Emergency stop K1
CNC +24 *ESP
i series servo amplifier (PS) Emergency stop K1
SV SP
+24(CX4) *ESP(CX4)
*ESP (CXA2A)
*ESP (CXA2B)
Emergency stop K1 off delay
MCCOFF3(CX3) MCCOFF4(CX3)
Power to the magnetic contactor coil
Surge killer Coil
L1 L2 L3
Main power supply
Circuit breaker
AC reactor
Break power (+)
Other conditions
CNC conditions
SA
Emergency stop K1
Motor brake coil
Break power (-)
Fig. 9.5(a) Example of connections with an i series servo amplifier
- 241 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 When emergency stop button S1 is pushed, emergency stop K1 is placed in the emergency stop state (open) and magnetic contactor K0 is placed in the shut-off state. 2 Set the off delay timer for shutting the power to the magnetic contactor coil in the above example as follows: - Set a value which allows the time required to normally stop by the spindle. - Set a value which allows the feed axis stop time also when the feed axis quick stop function and vertical axis fall prevention function are used. 3 Connect the auxiliary contact of magnetic contactor K0 to feedback input of the safety relay module so that a failure of magnetic contactor K0 can be detected.
Emergency stop button S1 Safety module relay
Safety input 1
Emergency
Safety stop K1 input 2
K1
Reset/
Magnetic contactor
K0
Ready
S2
feedback input
Emergency stop K1
CNC +24 *ESP
i SV series servo amplifier
i SV
Emergency stop K1
+24(CX30) *ESP(CX30)
*ESP (CXA19A)
*ESP (CXA19B)
Emergency stop K1 off delay RLY1(CX29) RLY2(CX29)

Surge killer Coil
L1 L2 L3
Main power supply
Circuit breaker
Magnetic contactor K0 Break power (+)
AC line filter
Other conditions
CNC conditions
SA
Emergency stop K1
Motor brake coil
Break power (-)
Fig. 9.5(a) Example of connections with a i series servo amplifier
- 242 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE 1 When emergency stop button S1 is pushed, emergency stop K1 is placed in the emergency stop state (open) and magnetic contactor K0 is placed in the shut-off state. 2 Set the off delay timer for shutting the power to the magnetic contactor coil in the above example as follows: - Set a value which allows the time required to normally stop by the spindle. - Set a value which allows the feed axis stop time also when the feed axis quick stop function and vertical axis fall prevention function are used. 3 Connect the auxiliary contact of magnetic contactor K0 to feedback input of the safety relay module so that a failure of magnetic contactor K0 can be detected.
Emergency stop button S1 Safety module relay
The dotted line indicates a signal showing data or logic flow.
Emergency stop K1 Magnetic contactor K0 Ready S2
Emergency stop K1
Contact input
CNC +24 *ESP(X8.4) *ESP(spindle)

Delay timer
Internal signal
Internal signal
i series servo amplifier Emergency stop K1

Contact input
SP
PWM on command
SV
PWM on command
(PS) 24V *ESP

Magnetic contactor on command
Internal signal
Spindle stop judgment
Delay timer
Internal signal
Emergency stop K1 off delay

Surge killer Coil
Power shut-off
Power shut-off
Main power supply
Circuit breaker
Motor
Motor
MCC K0
AC reactor
Fig. 9.5(c) Flow diagram of emergency stop circuit signals
- 243 -
B-63943EN/03
CAUTION 1 This CNC controller can detect overtravel by using a software limit function. If the software limit function does not operate effectively due to a failure, resulting in a possible serious accident or loss, install a safety circuit, for example, a stroke end limit switch arranged in series with the emergency stop button. 2 To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a manufacturer other than FANUC, refer to the corresponding documentation as well as this manual. Design the emergency stop sequence such that, if the emergency stop signal contact opens while the spindle motor is rotating, the spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.
- 244 -
B-63943EN/03
9.6
CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTI-PATH CONTROL
For multi-path control, multiple paths (up to 10 paths) belong to a machine group, and multiple machine groups (up to three groups) constitute a system. Example) Multi-path control configuration
Control unit Machine group 1 Machine group 2
Path 1
Path 2
Path 3
Path 4
Axis
Axis
Axis
Axis
Axis
Axis
Axis
Axis
Fig. 9.6 (a)
To prevent an emergency stop in one machine group from affecting another within a multi-path control system, a separate emergency stop circuit (see Fig. 9.6 (b)) must be provided for each machine group.
Machine group 1
Emergency stop button S1 Safety relay module Emergency stop K1
Safety input 2 Reset/ feedback input Safety input 1
Machine group 2
Emergency stop button S1 Safety relay module Emergency stop K1 MCC K0 Ready S2
Safety input 2 Reset/ feedback input Safety input 1
MCC K0
Ready S2
Emergency stop K1
CNC +24 *ESP
Emergency stop K1
CNC +24 *ESP
i series servo amplifier (PS) Emergency stop K1 +24(CX4) *ESP(CX4) Emergency stop K1 off delay MCCOFF3(CX3) MCCOFF4(CX3)
SV SP
i series servo amplifier (PS) Emergency stop K1 +24(CX4) *ESP(CX4) Emergency stop K1 off delay MCCOFF3(CX3) MCCOFF4(CX3)
SV SP
*ESP (CXA2A)
*ESP (CXA2B)
*ESP (CXA2A)
*ESP (CXA2B)
Spark killer
L1 L2 L3
Spark killer
L1 L2 L3
coil
Main circuit breaker Main circuit breaker
coil
Magnetic contactor K0 Break power (+)
AC reactor Break power (+)
AC reactor
Other conditions
CNC conditions
Emergency stop K1
Motor brake coil
SA
Break power (-)
Other conditions
CNC conditions
Emergency stop K1
Motor brake coil
SA
Break power (-)
Fig. 9.6 (b)
- 245 -
10.CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
B-63943EN/03
10
CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
The 30i series can be connected to the following networks. For an explanation of how to make the connection, refer to the manuals listed below:
Manual title FANUC DATA SERVER OPERATORS MANUAL FANUC Ethernet Board OPERATORS MANUAL FANUC PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL FANUC DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL FANUC FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL Manual code B-62694EN B-64014EN B-63993EN B-64043EN B-64163EN
- 246 -
B-63943EN/03
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is
11
11.1
11.1.1
CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is

TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
LCD-Mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is Control Unit
300is/310is/320is control unit
24V-IN(CPD16A) SPDL (JA41) I/O LINK(JD51A) HDI(JA40) MDI(CA55) FSSB(COP10A-1) FSSB(COP10A-2) The functions and connection methods of these connectors are the same as those in the Series 30i. See Chapters 1 to 12 for explanations about the connection methods.
R232-1/S.SPDL(JD56A)
{ {
RS-232-C I/O device Serial spindle
R232-2/USB(JD54)
RS-232-C I/O device PC USB printer USB keyboard
Ethernet(CD38S)
HUB Ethernet backbone cable
BACKUP POWER-IN (CA75 or CA113)
Backup unit
BUZZER for T.P. (CA76)
Buzzer
- 247 -
B-63943EN/03
11.1.2
Display Unit for is Series CNC (Stand-Alone Type)

CNC control unit Main board HSSB(COP21A)
MDI unit (CK27)
Display unit for is series CNC +24VDC power supply MDI(CA55)
HSSB(COP21M)
24V-IN(CDP18)
R232-2/USB(JD54)
RS-232-C I/O device PC USB keyboard USB printer
R232-1(JD36)
RS-232-C I/O device Ethernet backbone cable
Ethernet(CD38S)
HUB
BACKUP POWER-IN (CA75 or CA113)
Backup unit
BUZZER for T.P. (CA76)
Buzzer
The connections method other than those explained above are the same as those in the Series 30i/31i/32i. See Chapters 1 to 10 for explanations about the connection
- 248 -
B-63943EN/03
11.2
11.2.1
INSTALLATION
Connector Names and Connector Layout
11.2.1.1 LCD-mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is
Battery
Fan unit
Rear view
CA76 Soft key CA55 Power supply unit JD56A JA40 JA41 Fuse
Inverter connector for 12.1"/15" LCD
JD54
JD51A
CA75 or CA113
CP16A
CD38S
COP10A-1
COP10A-2
Connector No. CPD16A JA41 JD51A JA40 JD56A CA55 COP10A-1/2 CA75 or CA113 JD54 CD38S CA76
Function Connector for power supply Connector for serial spindle Connector for I/O Link Connector for analog spindle or high-speed skip Connector for I/O device interface or serial spindle Connector for MDI Connector for servo unit (1 : left side, 2 : right side) Connector for backup unit Connector for I/O device interface or USB device connection Connector for Ethernet Connector for buzzer
Reference item 11.3.1 6.1 8.2 5.4 11.3.4.16.1 5.1 11.3.2 11.3.4.2 , 11.3.4.3 11.3.3 11.3.6
- 249 -
B-63943EN/03
11.2.1.2 Display Unit for is Series
CA76
Fan unit
Rear view
CD38S
COP21M CA75 or CA113 Power supply unit
CA55 JD54 JD36 CPD18
Connector No. CPD18 COP21M CA55 CA75 or CA113 JD54 CD38S JD36 CA76
Function Connector for power supply Connector for HSSB Connector for MDI Connector for backup unit Connector for I/O device interface or USB device connection Connector for Ethernet Connector for I/O device interface Connector for buzzer
Reference item 11.3.1 11.3.5 5.1.3 11.3.2 11.3.4.2 , 11.3.4.3 11.3.3 11.3.4.1 11.3.6
11.2.2
Environmental Conditions for Control Units
The control units and peripheral units offered by FANUC are designed on the assumption that they will be enclosed in a tightly closed cabinet. The cabinet can be: One that is created by the machine tool builder to house a control unit or peripheral unit, Operator's pendant box created by the machine tool builder to house a control unit or operator's panel, or The like The following table lists the environmental conditions for control units housed in a cabinet listed above.
- 250 -
B-63943EN/03

Condition Series 300is/310is/320is-MODEL A 0C to 58C -20C to 60C 0.3C/minute or less 10% to 75%RH, no condensation 10% to 90%RH, no condensation Operating Storage, Transport Temperature change Normal Short period (less than 1 month)
Ambient temperature for display unit Humidity
Vibration
Meters above sea level Environment
0.5G or less The evaluation test is performed under the following conditions. 10 to 58Hz 0.075 mm (amplitude) Operating 58 to 500Hz 1G The test conforms to IEC60068-2-6 Non-operating 1.0G or less Operating Up to 1000m Non-operating Up to 12000m Normal machine shop environment (The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a location where the density of dust, coolant, organic solvent, and/or corrosive gas is relatively high.)
11.2.3
Power Supply Capacity
Using the 300is/310is/320is requires a 24 VDC 10% power input that satisfies the requirements listed below. The tolerance 10% includes instantaneous changes and ripples.
Power supply capacity (A) LCD-mounted type 10.4LCD 12.1LCD 15LCD 10.4LCD 12.1LCD 15LCD 3.3 3.5 4.0 2.7 2.8 3.3 Heat output (W) 44 48 60 29 32 44
Display unit for is series
*1: When the power is turned on, 1.5 A is consumed for one minute or so to charge the backup unit. The power requirements listed above include this current. *2: The current used in the LCD and MDI unit is included. No current for each option board is included. See Section 3.2, "Power Supply Capacity," for information about the power requirements of option boards. *3: If power is supplied to a FANUC device, from the RS-232-C port, 1 A is needed additionally.
- 251 -
B-63943EN/03
11.3
11.3.1
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Main Power Input
LCD-mounted type and Display unit for is series CPD16A (LCD-mounted type) CPD18 (Display unit for is series) 1 2 3 LCD-mounted type Display unit for is series CNC +24V 0V AMP Housing 1-178288-3 2-178288-3 Contact 1-175218-5 1-175218-5
+24VDC input
Separate housings are used for the LCD-mounted Type and the display unit for the is series CNC.
i)
Cable connection
CPD16A CPD18 +24V 2 0V 0V
1 +24V
NOTE 1 Keep the power supply cable away from other cables connected to the LCD-mounted type or display unit for is series CNC. 2 Turn on/off the power to the display unit for is series CNC within 100 ms after the power to the stand-alone type control unit is turned on/off. WARNING It is impossible to turn on and off the power to the display unit for is series CNC and the power to the CNC control unit separately.
- 252 -
B-63943EN/03
11.3.2
Backup Unit
After the power to the CNC is turned off, the backup unit enables power to be supplied to the internal circuits of the CNC for a certain period of time to execute a power turn-off sequence (for allowing important data to be automatically saved from main memory to a compact flash card). Unless there is a backup unit, no power turn-off sequence will be executed. For LCD-mounted type main boards C1 to C6 and is series CNC display units A13B-0198-B001 to A13B-0198-B032
(i)
Cable connection
- 253 -
B-63943EN/03
For LCD-mounted type main boards G1 to G6 and is series CNC display units A13B-0198-B041 to A13B-0198-B063
LCD-mounted type and Display unit for is series CA113 JAE LY20-22P-DTI-P3E-N A B 1 GND VCC 2 +24V +24V 3 BU1 BU2 4 GND VCC 5 BU5 VCC 6 BU7 GND 7 BU9 BU10 8 BU11 BU12 9 GND VCC 10 GND VCC 11 GND VCC Backup unit CN9 JAE LY20-20P-DTI-P A B 1 +24V +24V 2 BU1 BU2 3 BU3 BU4 4 BU5 BU6 5 BU7 BU8 6 BU9 BU10 7 BU11 BU12 8 GND VCC 9 GND VCC 10 GND VCC
Japan Aviation Electronics LY10-C2-3-10000 (contact)
LY10-DC22N (housing) LY10-DC20 (housing)
(i)
Cable connection
C A 11 3
+24V +24V BU1 BU2 GND VCC BU5 VCC BU7 GND BU9 BU10 B U 11 BU12 GND VCC GND VCC GND VCC A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 A1 B1 A 11 B 11 S h ie ld G r o u n d in g p la te A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 A10 B10
CN9
+24V +24V BU1 BU2 BU3 BU4 BU5 BU6 BU7 BU8 BU9 BU10 B U 11 BU12 GND VCC GND VCC GND VCC
R e c o m m e n d e d c a b le : A 0 2 B -0 3 0 3 -K 8 0 1 (5 0 c m ) R e c o m m e n d e d w ir e : A 6 6 L -0 0 0 1 -0 3 6 7
N O T E ) K e e p t h e c a b le le n g t h w it h in 5 0 c m .
- 254 -
B-63943EN/03
External dimensions of Backup unit
NOTE The above shows an outline drawing of the separate type backup unit (A02B-0303-C161). For an outline drawing when the backup unit is mounted on the MDI unit, see Appendix A.
- 255 -
B-63943EN/03
(iii) Mounting backup unit Install the backup unit on the rear of the MDI unit or in the pendant box where the CNC main unit is housed. Because the backup unit contains parts with limited service life, it should be installed in a place where parts can be replaced easily during maintenance work. Example of mounting the backup unit on the rear of the MDI unit
Connector (CA75 or CA113)
CO
Note2
Clamp Connector
Backup unit
NOTE 1 The connector of the backup unit cable is of an easy lock type. Clamp the cable near the connector so that the connector will not be pulled with the weight of the cable. 2 Connect the shielding terminal of the backup unit to a grounded cabinet or the grounding stud on the LCD-mounted type or the display unit for the is series CNC mounted on a grounded cabinet.
- 256 -
B-63943EN/03
11.3.3
Ethernet Interface (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX)
NOTE Before attaching or removing cables, power off the CNC main unit, and confirm that the power is off. Ask the respective manufacturers for explanations about how to build a network and about conditions for using units (such as a media converter, hub, transceiver, and cable) other than the CNC unit. When installing network cables, exercise sufficient caution so that the network will not be affected by any noise source. Electrically separate the network wiring sufficiently from noise sources like motors and their power lines. Also, ground each unit as required. If the grounding impedance is high, it may cause trouble in communication. Once the equipment is installed, conduct communication tests to verify normal operation before starting actual use of the equipment. FANUC is not liable to any damage related to trouble arising from any unit other than the CNC unit.
(1) Connection to the Ethernet Interface The 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX interfaces are available. A hub (line concentrator) is used to connect the CNC unit to a system. A typical connection example is shown below.
LCD-mounted type unit or display unit for is series CNC
Twisted-pair cable
Max. 100m
HUB (line concentrator)
Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not dust-proof. Using them in an atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet. (2) Leading in Ethernet cables An Ethernet cable should be fixed with a clamp or the like so that pulling it will not cause tension to be applied to the connector (RJ-45) at the end of the cable. The clamp not only fixes the cable but also grounds the shield of the cable.
- 257 -

LCD-mounted type or display unit for is series CNC
B-63943EN/03
Ethernet cable
Clamp
Ground plate
(3) Pin arrangement of the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector (CD38S) CD38S

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal name TX+ TXRX+ Transmit + Transmit Receive + Not used Not used Receive Not used Not used Description
RX-
- 258 -
B-63943EN/03
(4) Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable (a) Cable connection The connectors of a cable for connecting between the 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX interface (CD38S) and the hub have the pin arrangement shown below.
NOTE The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
(b) Cable Wires Many cables without a shield (UTP cables) are commercially available as twisted pair cables conforming to 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX. To improve noise immunity in factory automation environments, however, be sure to use twisted pair cables (STP cables) with a common shield in category 5. Recommended cables (for fixed parts)
Manufacturer Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. Nissei Electric Co., Ltd. Specification DTS5087C-4P F-4PFWMF Remark Twisted wires Single-wire cable
NOTE These recommended cables for fixed parts must not be used for movable sections. Be sure to use the following recommended cables for movable sections.
- 259 -

Recommended cable (for movable sections)
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Specification AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) Remark
B-63943EN/03
Dedicated to FANUC products
Cable specification (FANUC original product, with no connector) Drawing number: A66L-0001-0453 Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Specification Electrical characteristic: Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5 The length of the cable to the hub must be kept within 50 m because of its attenuation performance. Structure : Common-shield braided cable with drain wire The conductors of the cable are AWG26 annealed-copper strand wire, with a sheath 0.8 mm thick and an outer diameter of 6.70.3 mm Fire resistance : UL1581 VW-1 Oil resistance : As per FANUC's internal standard (Equivalent to conventional oil-resistant electrical cable) Flex resistance : Million or more bending cycles with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped bend test) UL style No. : AWM20276 (80C/30V/VW-1)
NOTE Use the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. to this cable.
About cable assemblies Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can offer a cable assembly that uses the TM21CP-88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. To get this cable assembly, negotiate directly with the manufacturer on its specifications (cable length, shipping test, package, etc.). (c) Connector specification An 8-pin modular connector called the RJ-45 is used with a twisted-pair cable for Ethernet interfaces. Use the connector listed below or equivalent.
Specification Connector used with cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) TM21CP-88P(03) Manufacturer Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Remark (*)
- 260 -
B-63943EN/03
NOTE About TM21CP-88P(03) Connector (manufacturer's standard product) Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P Manufacturer: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Manufacturer's model number: TM21CP-88P(03) Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5 Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about how to attach the connector to a cable. (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the TM21CP-88P(03) Wiring Procedure Specification (Engineering Specification No. ATAD-E2367) to explain the related technical information.)
(5) Anti-Noise Measure (i) Separating signal lines Ethernet cable wires belong to group C. See descriptions elsewhere for explanations about how to separate them from wires in group A or B. (ii) Cable Clamp and Shield Processing If a cable connected to the CNC requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below. The clamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stable operation of the system. Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Cable Ground plate Cable clamp
Shield Cable shield
NOTE Select a cable with a proper length. If the cable is too long, the noise immunity may be reduced or noise may be caused on other cables. In addition, when the excess length is coiled, the inductance is increased and a high voltage is induced during turning on or off of signals. This may cause malfunction due to a failure or noise.
- 261 -

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Mount screw hole
B-63943EN/03
Ground terminal (grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface is plated with nickel.
8mm Ground plate
12mm
20mm
Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp A02B-0083-K301 (20 pieces) (iii) Network Installation Even when the machine satisfies its grounding requirements, noise from the machine may get on communication lines depending on the way the machine is installed and its environment, resulting in a communication error. Separating and isolating the Ethernet backbone cable and PC from the machine can prevent noise from getting on the communication lines. An example of connection is shown below.
- 262 -
B-63943EN/03
[Large-scale network]
PC
(Note1) HUB PC and backbone cable side Electrical separation by connection with 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Machine system Machine (Note1) Machine (Note1) STP cable
Power supply for the HUB
STP cable
Machine (Note1)
[Small-scale network]
PC
Power supply for the HUB (Note1) PC and backbone cable side Electrical separation by connection with 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Machine system side Machine STP cable HUB
(Note1)
NOTE 1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from the machine system. If this is impossible because there is only one grounding point, use separate grounding wires for the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up to the grounding point. The grounding resistance must not be higher than 100 (class 3 grounding). The grounding wire must not be thinner than the AC power line conductor, and its cross-sectional area must not smaller than 5.5 mm2. 2 In some cases, the aforementioned isolation/separation method based on 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cannot assure normal communication because of influence by noise. In such worst environments, use optical fiber media to completely isolate the machine from the PC.
- 263 -
B-63943EN/03
11.3.4
Serial Port and USB Port
A connector (JD54) of the LCD-mounted type and the display unit for is series CNCs functions as a serial port and USB port. A connector (JD56A) of the LCD-mounted type functions as a serial port and is used for serial spindles. A connector (JD36) of the display unit for is series CNCs functions as a serial port.
11.3.4.1 Serial port 1

LCD-mounted type (JD56A) or display unit for is series CNC (JD36)
PCR-E20MD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RD 0V DR 0V CS 0V CD 0V (*) +24V SD 11 0V 12 ER 13 0V 14 RS 15 0V 16 17 (*) 18 (+5V)(*) 19 +24V 20 (+5V)(*)
Relay connector (example 1)

D-SUB 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

D-SUB 9 1 2 3 4 5 CD RD SD ER SG 6 7 8 9 DR RS CS RI
Shield
ER RI
+24V
NOTE 1 The +24V signal is used as the power supply to FANUC's RS-232C device. 2 Pins with no signal name must be left open. 3 The +5V pins with pin Nos. 18 and 20 must be left open. 4 The (*) marked pins of JD56A are used for serial spindles.
- 264 -
B-63943EN/03
(i)
Connection example (Example 1: Conversion to D-SUB 25-pin connector)

Relay connector D-SUB 25 (example 1) 02 SD 03 RD 04 RS 05 CS 06 DR 20 ER 08 CD 22 RI 07 SG Shield Ground plate 25 +24V 01 FG GND
JD56A,JD36 SD 11 0V 12 RD 01 0V 02 RS 15 0V 16 CS 05 0V 06 DR 03 0V 04 ER 13 0V 14 CD 07 0V 08 +24V 10 +24V 19
Recommended wire specification: A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG 10-pair) Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD56A or JD36 side) : Connector Housing Manufacture PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA Honda Tsushin Kogyo FI30-20S FI-20-CV2 Hirose Electric FI-20-CV7 FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu 52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan Recommended cable specification (name: For JD36, JD56A, JD54 Narrow type A02B-0236-C191 (1m) A02B-0236-C192 (2m) A02B-0236-C193 (5m) Punch panel)
(ii) Connection example (Example 2: Conversion to D-SUB 9-pin connector)

Relay connector JD56A, JD36 SD 11 0V 12 RD 01 0V 02 RS 15 0V 16 CS 05 0V 06 DR 03 0V 04 ER 13 0V 14 CD 07 0V 08 +24V 10 +24V 19 D-SUB 9 (example 2) 3 SD 2 RD 7 RS 8 CS 6 DR 4 ER 1 CD 9 RI 5 SG
Shield Ground plate
- 265 -

(iii) Connection example (Example 3: Connection with a PC for remote debugging)
Relay connector D-SUB 9 (example 3)
B-63943EN/03
JD56A,JD36 SD 11 0V 12 RD 01 0V 02 RS 15 0V 16 CS 05 0V 06 DR 03 0V 04 ER 13 0V 14 CD 07 +24V 10 +24V 19

Shield Ground plate
3 SD 2 RD 7 RS 8 CS 6 DR 4 ER 1 CD 9 RI 5 SG
NOTE For connection with a PC, create a cable according to the connector pin arrangement on the PC side.
11.3.4.2 Serial port 2

LCD-mounted type or display unit for is series CNC JD54
PCR-E20MD RD SD 1 11 0V 0V 2 12 DR ER 3 13 0V 0V 4 14 CS RS 5 15 6 Reserve 16 Reserve CD 7 17 Reserve 8 Reserve 18 Reserve 9 Reserve 19 +24V 10 +24V 20 Reserve

D-SUB 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

D-SUB 9 1 2 3 4 5 CD RD SD ER SG 6 7 8 9 DR RS CS RI
Shield
ER RI
+24V
NOTE 1 The +24V signal is used as the power supply to FANUC's RS-232C device. 2 This connector is used also as a USB port. The Reserve pins must be left open.
- 266 -
B-63943EN/03
(i)
Connection example (Example 1: Conversion to D-SUB 25-pin connector)

Relay connector JD54 SD 11 0V 12 RD 01 0V 02 RS 15 CS 05 DR 03 04 ER 13 0V 14 CD 07 10 19 Shield Ground plate
D-SUB 25 (Example 1) A66L-0001-0284#10P 02 SD
Recommended wire specification: (#28AWG 10 pairs) Recommended connector and housing (JD54 side): Connector Housing Manufacturer PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA Honda Tsushin Kogyo FI30-20S FI-20-CV2 Hirose FI-20-CV7 Electric FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu 52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan Recommended cable specification (name: For JD36A, JD56A, JD54 Narrow type A02B-0236-C191 (1m) A02B-0236-C192 (2m) A02B-0236-C193 (5m) Punch panel)
03
RD
04 05 06
RS CS DR
0V
20
ER
08 22
CD RI SG +24V FG
+24V +24V
07 25 01 GND
(ii) Connection example (Example 2: Conversion to D-SUB 9-pin connector)

Relay connector D-SUB 9 (Example 2)
JD54
SD 11 0V 12 RD 01 0V 02 RS 15 CS 05 DR 03 0V 04 ER 13 0V 14 CD 07 +24V 10 +24V 19
Shield Ground plate
- 267 -

(iii) Connection example (Example 3: Connection to a PC for remote debugging)
Relay connector D-SUB 9 (Example 3)
B-63943EN/03
JD54 SD 11 0V 12 RD 01 0V 02 RS 15 CS 05 DR 03 0V 04 ER 13 0V 14 CD 07 +24V 10 +24V 19

Shield Ground plate
NOTE When connecting this connector to a PC, check the connector pin layout on the PC side, then create a cable accordingly.
11.3.4.3 USB port (rear side)

This port is used to connect a USB keyboard or USB printer.
LCD-mounted type or display unit for is series CNC JD54
PCR-E20MD 1 Reserve 11 2 Reserve 12 3 Reserve 13 4 Reserve 14 5 Reserve 15 6 USB_+ 16 7 Reserve 17 8 USB_- 18 9 Reserve 19 10 Reserve 20 Reserve USB_0V Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve USB_5V
Relay connector
USB 1 2 3 4 5V DD+ 0V
NOTE This connector is used also as a serial port. The Reserve pins must be left open.
- 268 -
B-63943EN/03

Recommended cable specification: Use a USB complient cable. Recommended connector and housing (JD54 side): Connector Housing Manufacturer PCR-E20FA PCR-V20LA Honda Tsushin Kogyo FI30-20S FI-20-CV2 Hirose FI-20-CV7 Electric FCN-247J020-G/E FCN-240C020-Y/S Fujitsu 52622-2011 52624-2015 Molex Japan
(i)
Connection example (conversion to a USB connector (type A, receptacle])

JD54 USB connector 03 D+ 02 D04 0V 01 5V
Shield
USB_+ USB_-
06 08
12 USB_0V 20 USB_5V
NOTE 1 Commercially available USB devices are prone to compatibility problems with USB hosts to some degree. It is not guaranteed that every commercially available USB device can operate properly with USB hosts. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of the USB devices they select. Keep in mind that commercially available USB devices are generally neither dust-proof nor moisture-resistant. 2 Generally, USB devices can be connected with the power kept on (hot plugging). With this connector (JD54), however, hot plugging cannot be performed. By using a USB connector (type A, receptacle) as a relay connector, hot plugging becomes possible in the outer range from the USB relay connector. 3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current on the front and rear sides is 500 mA in total.
- 269 -
B-63943EN/03
11.3.4.4 USB port (front side)

This port is used to connect a USB keyboard or USB printer.
USB port (front view)
NOTE 1 Commercially available USB devices are prone to compatibility problems with USB hosts to some degree. It is not guaranteed that every commercially available USB device can operate properly with USB hosts. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of the USB devices they select. Keep in mind that commercially available USB devices are generally neither dust-proof nor moisture-resistant. 2 The USB port on the front side allows a device to be connected to the port with the power kept on (hot plugging). 3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current on the front and rear sides is 500 mA in total.
- 270 -
B-63943EN/03
11.3.5
High-speed Serial Bus (HSSB) [For Stand-alone Type]

Main board of stand-alone type CNC Optical fiber cable COP21A COP21M Display unit for is series CNC
1)
2)
3)
Recommended cable (optical fiber cable) A66L-6001-0026#L1R003 : Cable length=1m A66L-6001-0026#L3R003 : Cable length=3m A66L-6001-0026#L5R003 : Cable length=5m A66L-6001-0026#L7R003 : Cable length=7m A66L-6001-0026#L10R03 : Cable length=10m A66L-6001-0026#L15R03 : Cable length=15m A66L-6001-0026#L20R03 : Cable length=20m A66L-6001-0026#L30R03 : Cable length=30m A66L-6001-0026#L50R03 : Cable length=50m Recommended cables (low-loss optical fiber cables specially designed as relay cables) A66L-6001-0029#L1R003 : Cable length=1m A66L-6001-0029#L3R003 : Cable length=3m A66L-6001-0029#L5R003 : Cable length=5m A66L-6001-0029#L7R003 : Cable length=7m A66L-6001-0029#L10R03 : Cable length=10m A66L-6001-0029#L15R03 : Cable length=15m A66L-6001-0029#L20R03 : Cable length=20m A66L-6001-0029#L30R03 : Cable length=30m Low-loss optical relay adapter A63L-0020-0004
WARNING Cables and adapters other than the recommended ones cannot be used. Optical fiber cables cannot be cut and connected by the machine tool builder. When relay is required, be sure to use one of the low-loss optical fiber cables specially designed as relay cables and the low-loss optical adapter. For handling of optical fiber cables, see Appendix D, "OPTICAL FIBER CABLES". NOTE Relay is possible only at one point.
11.3.6
Buzzer Output
The Series 300is/310is/320is has a buzzer output connector (CA76) for touch panel confirmation so that an externally connected buzzer can be driven to sound as the touch panel is touched.
Specifications of a connectable buzzer

Operating voltage Specification Operating current
5V
20 mA max
- 271 -
11.CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is Connector (CA76)

Connector used (device side) Mating connector (cable side)
B-63943EN/03
Molex Japan 5045-02A Molex Japan 5051-02 (housing) Molex Japan 5159PBTL (terminal)
Buzzer output circuit (equivalent circuit)

+5V Resistor CA76 01 02 + Buzzer (connected externally)
Buzzer ON signal (internal CNC signal) 0V
CAUTION Never short-circuit the connector pins. Be careful not to apply noise to the connection cable of the buzzer.
- 272 -
B-63943EN/03
12.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS
12
12.1 12.2
CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS

OVERVIEW
This chapter describes how to connect the control unit to the FANUC PANEL i or a commercial personal computer, using the high-speed serial bus (HSSB) or Ethernet.
CAUTIONS
The FANUC PANEL i or a Windows-compatible personal computer commercially available is to be connected. The user (machine tool builder or end user) is required to procure and maintain a commercial personal computer if the user is to use it. FANUC owns the copyright for the driver used to connect a personal computer. The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manuals may not be used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior written permission of FANUC.
NOTE 1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US. 2 Windows is registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of the US. 3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.
12.3
12.3.1
CONNECTION USING THE HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)

Overview
The high-speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high-speed transfer of large amounts of data between a commercial personal computer and the control unit, by connecting them via a high-speed optical fiber. For an LCD-mounted type control unit, an HSSB interface board is inserted in an optional slot. For a stand-alone type control unit, the HSSB interface is provided as standard. It also allows an HSSB interface board to be inserted in an optional slot. On the personal computer, an appropriate interface board is installed. You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead of a commercial PC. The FANUC PANEL i comes standard with the HSSB interface.
- 273 -
B-63943EN/03
12.3.2
Connection Diagram
Personal computer interface board (for PCI) COP21N HSSB interface board for control unit (optional slot)
COP21M LCD-mounted type control unit (rear)
Commercial PC COP21A (main board)
COP21M PANEL i
COP21N HSSB interface board for control unit (optional slot)
Stand-alone type control unit Note: Only an interface board for the PCI bus is provided as the interface board to be installed in the personal computer.
12.3.3
Specifications of a Commercial PC
NOTE 1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to procure and maintain the personal computer. 2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting from the operation of users' personal computers, regardless of whether the operations are normal or abnormal. 3 Perform a connection test between the PC and control unit before using the PC sufficiently.
(1) The PC must have a PCI slot (5 V) to install an interface board. (2) An HSSB driver must be installed on the PC. The HSSB driver is stored on the FOCAS1/2 library disk (ordering information: A02B-0207-K737). (3) Following shows the required power of the interface board for PCI type.
Drawing No. A20B-8101-0160 A20B-8101-0161 A20B-8101-0162 A20B-8101-0163 Specification 2ch specification 1ch specification 2ch specification 1ch specification Power supply requirements +5V 1.5A, +12V 20mA +5V 1A, +12V 20mA +5V 1.5A +5V 1A Remarks New ordering is not allowed. New ordering is not allowed. New ordering is allowed. New ordering is allowed.
- 274 -
B-63943EN/03
12.3.4
Installation Environment
Operating Non-operating Usual Short-term (within one month) 0 to 55C -20 to 60C 10 to 75% (non-condensing) 10 to 95% (non-condensing)
(1) HSSB Interface Board For Personal Computer

Ambient temperature Humidity
If the environmental requirement of the using personal computer is different from the above, please keep the environmental requirement to be satisfied by the both equipments. (2) HSSB Interface Board For control unit Strictly keep environmental requirement about each control unit in which the interface boards are installed.
12.3.5
Handling Precautions
(1) Personal computer interface board (a) Electrostatic interference The personal computer interface board is shipped in an anti-static bag. To store or transport the interface board, always place it in the anti-static bag. Before removing the interface board from the anti-static bag, ground your body. (b) Protection of card edge terminals When handling the personal computer interface board, do NOT touch its card edge terminals (the gold-plated contacts which engage with a mating connector). If you accidentally touch any card edge terminal, wipe it gently with clean or ethyl alcohol-dipped tissue paper or absorbent cotton. Do not use any organic solvent other than ethyl alcohol. (2) Optical connector and fiber cable See Appendix D.
12.3.6
Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface Boards
WARNING Before starting to mount or remove a personal computer interface board, switch off the personal computer and its peripheral devices, and disconnect their power supply cables. Otherwise, there is a serious danger of electric shock.
(1) (2) (3) (4) Remove the covering plate of extension slot on the personal computer. Insert the interface board for the personal computer to the PCI connector tightly. Screw the plate of interface board to the computer. Confirm connection (in only case of HSSB multi-connection) Confirm following items for installing drivers of HSSB interface board in case of HSSB multi-connection. PCI slot number which HSSB board is mounted (slot number is marked to PCB normally). Correspondence between HSSB channel and CNC (5) Restore the covering plate.
NOTE Do not touch the leads running to the card edge of the interface board (that match with connectors).
- 275 -
B-63943EN/03
12.3.7
Cable Connection
Optical fiber cable Personal computer interface board or PANELi
HSSB interface board for control unit or main board for stand alone type COP21N or COP21A
COP21M
(1) Optical fiber cable for HSSB Cable for inside wire A66L-6001-0023#L~ (maximum cable length: 10m) Cable for outside wire A66L-6001-0026#L~ (maximum cable length: 50m) Low-loss cable for outside wire (for relay only) A66L-6001-0029#L~ (maximum total length of two cables: 35 m) High-speed low-loss cable for outside wire A66L-6001-0049#L~ (maximum cable length: 100m, maximum total length of two cables for relay: 55m) (2) Low-loss optical junction adapter A63L-0020-0004
NOTE 1 For explanations about how to specify the length of the underscored portion and the related cautions, see Appendix D. 2 The machine tool builder cannot cut or connect any optical fiber cable. Be sure to use the cables above.
- 276 -
B-63943EN/03
12.4
12.4.1
CONNECTION USING Ethernet

Overview
You can connect the control unit with a commercial PC to use the PC as the display unit of the control unit and transfer data between the control unit and PC, using Ethernet. You can also use the Ethernet display function to perform maintenance and IPL operation for the control unit from the PC at power-on. You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead of a commercial PC.
12.4.2
Connection Diagram
LCD-mounted type control unit (rear) Fast Ethernet board (optional slot)
Ethernet port
CD38A,CD38B (main board)
Commercial PC
CD38A (main board) CD38R Fast Ethernet board (optional slot) Stand-alone type control unit
CD38U PANEL i
NOTE 1 For connection to the Ethernet interface, see Section 5.5. 2 For connection using the Fast Ethernet board, refer to the FANUC Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server Operators Manual (B-64014EN). When a PC is connected using Fast Ethernet, the Ethernet display function cannot be used to perform maintenance and IPL operation for the control unit from the PC at power-on. 3 For the Ethernet display function, refer to Appendixes B and C in the FANUC PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN). The Ethernet display function is available when a PC is connected using Embedded Ethernet on a stand-alone type control unit. The function cannot be used on any LCD-mounted type control unit or with Fast Ethernet.
- 277 -
13.PANEL i
B-63943EN/03
13
PANEL i
The PANEL i is on an IBM PC compatible panel computer. Connecting the PANEL i to the control unit via an optical fiber (high-speed serial bus) or Ethernet can provide a system with PC functions. For details of the PANEL i (including installation environment conditions and connection), refer to the FANUC PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN). For connection with the control unit, see Chapter 12.
- 278 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
A.OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS
OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS

Unit name Fig. 7.2STN monochrome LCD 8.4TFT color LCD 10.4TFT color LCD 15TFT color LCD 10.4TFT color LCD 12.1TFT color LCD 15TFT color LCD Fig.U1 Fig.U2 Fig.U3 Fig.U4 Fig.U3 Fig.U5 Fig.U4
Outline drawings for LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/300is/310is/320is

Series 30i/31i/32i control unit
Series 300is/310is/320is control unit
Outline drawings for stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i/300i/310i/320i/300is/310is/320is

Unit name Series 30i/31i/32i/300i/310i/320i/ 2 slots 300is/310is/320is control unit 4 slots Series 30i/31i/32i display unit 10.4" color LCD Series 30i/31i/32i display unit 15" color LCD PANEL i 10.4" color LCD PANEL i 15" color LCD Automobile manufacturer specification PANEL i Series 300is/310is/320is display unit 10.4" color LCD Series 300is/310is/320is display unit 12.1" color LCD Series 300is/310is/320is display unit 15" color LCD Fig. Fig.U6 Fig.U7 Fig.U8 Fig.U9 Fig.U10 Fig.U11 Fig.U12, Fig.U12-2 Fig.U13 Fig.U14 Fig.U9 Fig. Fig.U15 Fig.U16 Fig.U17, Fig.U17-2 Fig.U18, Fig.U18-2 Fig.U19, Fig.U19-2 Fig.U20(a) Fig.U20(b) Fig.U20(c) Fig.U22 Fig.U23 Fig.U24 Fig.U25 Fig.U26 Fig.U27 Fig.U28 Fig.U29 Fig.U30(a) Fig.U30(d) Fig.U30(b) Fig.U30(d) Fig.U30(c) Fig.U31 Fig.U32 Fig.U33 Fig.U34 Fig.U35 Fig.U36
Other outline drawings

Unit name Small MDI unit (ONG, for 7.2/8.4) Standard MDI unit (ONG, for 7.2/8.4) Standard MDI unit (ONG, horizontal placement) Standard MDI unit (ONG, vertical placement) Standard MDI unit (QWERTY) Hard disk unit 1 Hard disk unit 2 Hard disk unit 3 Screw cap Manual pulse generator Pendant type manual pulse generator Separate detector interface unit Absolute pulse coder battery case for a separate detector CNC battery case for external installation Punch panel (for LCD-mounted type) Punch panel (for stand-alone type) FA full keyboard (10.4 LCD type) Panel cut drawing FA full keyboard (15 LCD type) Panel cut drawing FA full keyboard (15 LCD type, with a punch panel) Independent punch panel Full keyboard Mouse Floppy disk unit (3.5" FDD, panel mount type) Floppy disk drive (single unit) HSSB interface board on the personal computer side
- 281 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
0 slot
1 slot
2 slots
Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment
7.2" unit mounting hole machining drawing (Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then attach caps. See Fig. U22.)
Weight: 2.2 kg (Unit: mm)
Fig.U1
7.2STN monochrome LCD
- 282 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
0 slot
1 slot
2 slots
Dashed line: Area for packing attachment
Fig.U2
8.4TFT color LCD
- 283 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
0 slot
1 slot
2 slots
Fig.U3 Series 30i/31i/32i control unit Series 300is/310is/320is control unit
10.4TFT color LCD 10.4TFT color LCD
- 284 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
0 slot
1 slot
2 slots
15" unit mounting hole machining drawing (Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
Weight: 5 kg (Unit: mm)
Fig.U4 Series 30i/31i/32i control unit Series 300is/310is/320is control unit
15TFT color LCD 15TFT color LCD
- 285 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
6-M4 stud
6-M4 stud
6-M4 stud
Mounted-type 0 slot
Mounted-type 1 slot
Mounted-type 2 slots
12.1" unit mounting hole machining drawing (Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
Fig.U5
Series 300is/310is/320is control unit
12.1TFT color LCD
- 286 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Memory card
Fig.U6
Series 30i/31i/32i/300i/310i/320i/300is/310is/320is control unit
2 slots
- 287 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Memory card
Fig.U7
Series 30i/31i/32i/300i/310i/320i/300is/310is/320is control unit
4 slots
- 288 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
10.4" LCD unit mounting hole machining drawing (Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then attach caps. See Fig. U22.)
Fig.U8
Series 30i/31i/32i display unit 10.4" color LCD
- 289 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
8-M4 stud
15" LCD unit mounting hole machining drawing (Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
Fig.U9 Series 30i/31i/32i display unit Series 300is/310is/320is display unit
15" color LCD 15 color LCD
- 290 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Top view
Front view
Side view
PCI card cable connection area Cable connection area
Frame ground
Drawing of the lower-right corner on the rear Panel cut drawing (Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then attach a cap to the screw holes.) Area for packing attachment Weight: 3.5 kg (Unit: mm)
Fig.U10
PANEL i 10.4" color LCD
- 291 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Top view
8-M stud
Side view
Front view Cable connection area PCI card cable connection area
Frame ground
Drawing of the lower-right corner on the rear
Panel cut drawing (Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
Area for packing attachment
Fig.U11
PANEL i 15" color LCD
- 292 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Top view (Without FDD and CD-ROM drive unit)
However, this dimension is 20 mm for the screw sections of the door for the PCMCIA slot and USB interface.
Top view (With FDD and CD-ROM drive unit)
Door mounting screw Door mounting screw
Front view
Weight: 10 kg (Unit: mm)
Fig.U12
Automobile manufacturer specification PANEL i
- 293 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
14-M4 stud Rear view
Panel cut drawing (Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet.)
(Unit: mm)
Fig.U12-2
Automobile manufacturer specification PANEL i
- 294 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
10.4" LCD unit mounting hole machining drawing (Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then attach caps. See Fig. U22.)
Fig.U13
Series 300is/310is/320is display unit
10.4 color LCD
- 295 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
6-M4 stud
12.1" unit mounting hole machining drawing (Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
Fig.U14
Series 300is/310is/320is display unit
12.1 color LCD
- 296 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
MDI unit mounting hole machining drawing (Screw the unit from the outside of the cabinet then attach caps. See Fig. U22.)
Fig.U15
Small MDI unit (ONG, for 7.2/8.4)
- 297 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.U16
Standard MDI unit (ONG, for 7.2/8.4)
- 298 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.U17
Standard MDI unit (ONG, horizontal placement)
- 299 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Connector
Backup unit
Fig.U17-2
Standard MDI unit (ONG, horizontal placement, with backup unit)
- 300 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.U18
Standard MDI unit (ONG, vertical placement)
- 301 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Connector
Backup unit
Fig.U18-2
Standard MDI unit (ONG, vertical placement, with backup unit)
- 302 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.U19
Standard MDI unit (QWERTY)
- 303 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Connector
Backup unit
Fig.U19-2
Standard MDI unit (QWERTY, with backup unit)
- 304 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Unit: mm Weight: 1.1 kg
Fig.U20(a)
Hard disk unit 1
Fig.U20(b)
Hard disk unit 2
- 305 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.U20(c)
Hard disk unit 3
- 306 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Screw cap for the top-left and lower-right corners
Screw cap for the top-right and lower-left corners
For cap type identification, a projection is provided only on type A.
Pay attention to the cap direction.
Fig.U22
Screw cap
- 307 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
3-M4 72, equally spaced
Fig.U23
Manual pulse generator
Fig.U24
Pendant type manual pulse generator
- 308 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
The connector names indicated in parentheses are applicable to the extension unit. The connectors CP11, JA4A, COP10A, and COP10B are not provided on the extension unit.
Fig.U25
- 309 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
4-4.3 mounting hole

Minus terminal with 3-M3 screw holes Plus terminal with 3-3M screw holes
Countersink for 4-M4
Plus polarity indication Minus polarity indication
Mounting hole machining drawing
Weight: 0.4 kg (case only) (Unit: mm)
Fig.U26
Absolute pulse coder battery case for a separate detector
- 310 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Main unit Lid

Weight: 0.9 kg (case only) (Unit: mm)
Countersink for 4-M4
With a battery cable 14 m long
Fig.U27
CNC battery case for external installation
- 311 -
Fig.U28
APPENDIX
Punch panel (for LCD-mounted type)
- 312 A paint masking zone 8 mm wide is provided on the periphery of the rear of the plate.
B-63943EN/03
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
A paint masking zone 8 mm wide is provided on the periphery of the rear of the plate.
Fig.U29
Punch panel (for stand-alone type)
The panel cut dimensions of this punch panel are indicated below.
- 313 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.U30(a)
FA full keyboard (10.4 LCD type)
- 314 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Blank panel
Connector panel opening
The rear side is not painted in any color.
Fig.U30(b)
FA full keyboard (15 LCD type)
- 315 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Top view
Front view
Side view
Panel cut
Fig.U30(c)
FA full keyboard (15 LCD type, with a punch panel)
- 316 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX

For FA full keyboard of 10.4" LCD type
Note) For the panel cut data of the basic unit and floppy disk unit, see the outline drawing of each unit.
Fig.U30(d)
Panel cut drawing
- 317 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Top view
Panel cut Front view Side view
Fig.U31
Independent punch panel
- 318 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Full keyboard of type 101 (A86L-0001-0210)
Full keyboard of type 106 (A86L-0001-0211)
Caution) Both of type 101 and type 106 are not of dust-proof type. These types should be used for program development. Use these types in the ambient temperature range 0C to 40C.
Fig.U32
Full keyboard
- 319 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Cap
Ball
Device name attachment position Weight: 0.2 kg (Unit: mm) Caution) This mouse is not of dust-proof type. This mouse should be used for program development and maintenance only. Use this mouse in the ambient temperature range 0C to 40C.
Fig.U33
Mouse
- 320 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Front view
Side view
Panel cut drawing Mounting direction: When mounting this floppy disk unit onto the machine, ensure that the floppy disk unit is mounted in one of the directions shown below.
Fig.U34
Floppy disk unit (3.5" FDD, panel mount type)
- 321 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Weight: 0.4 kg The tolerance with no indication is (Unit: mm) 1.0.
Fig.U35
Floppy disk drive (single unit)
A20B-8101-0160 to A20B-8101-0163
Weight: 0.1 kg Unit: mm
(For 1ch) -0161 -0163
(For 2ch) -0160 -0162
Fig.U36
HSSB interface board on the personal computer side
- 322 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX Connectors Fig. title

Specification No. PCR-E20FS FI40-2015S PCR-V20LA/PCR-V20LB FI-20-CV FCN-240C20-Y/S FI-20-CV7 AMP1-178128-3 AMP2-178128-3 AMP1-178288-3 AMP2-178288-3 AMP1-175218-2/5 AMP1-175196-2/5 Fig. No. Fig.C1 (a) Fig.C1 (b) Fig.C2 (a) Fig.C2 (b) Fig.C2 (c) Fig.C2 (d) Fig.C3 (a) Fig.C3 (b) Fig.C3 (c) Fig.C3 (d) Fig.C3 (e) Fig.C4 (a) Fig.C4 (b) Fig.C4 (c) Fig.C4 (d) Fig.C4 (e) Fig.C5 Fig.C6 Fig.C7 (a) Fig.C7 (b) Fig.C8 (a) Fig.C8 (b) Fig.C9 Fig.C10 Fig.C11
PCR connector (soldering type) FI40 connector Connector case (HONDA PCR type) Connector case (HIROSE FI type) Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type) Connector case (HIROSE PCR type) AMP connector (1) for servo side AMP connector (2) for servo side AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply Contact for AMP connector HONDA connector (case) HONDA connector (angled case) HONDA connector (male) HONDA connector (female) HONDA connector (terminal layout) Connector (Burndy Japan)(3 pins/brown) Connector for HIROSE flat cable Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) AMP connector (for loader I/O board) Faston terminal
SMS3PN-5 HIF3BB-50D-2.54R HIF3BB-34D-2.54R LY10-DC20 LY10-C2-3
MRH-50FD AMP178214-1 A02B-0166-K330
- 323 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C1 (a)
PCR connector (soldering type)
- 324 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C1 (b)
FI40 connector
- 325 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C2 (a)
Connector case (HONDA PCR type)
- 326 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C2 (b)
Connector case (HIROSE FI type)
- 327 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C2 (c)
Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)
- 328 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C2 (d)
Connector case (HIROSE PCR type)
- 329 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C3 (a)
AMP connector (1) for servo side
- 330 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C3 (b)
AMP connector (2) for servo side
- 331 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C3 (c)
AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply
- 332 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C3 (d)
AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply
- 333 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C3 (e)
Contact for AMP connector
- 334 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C4 (a)
HONDA connector (case)
- 335 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C4 (b)
HONDA connector (angled case)
- 336 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C4 (c)
HONDA connector (male)
- 337 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C4 (d)
HONDA connector (female)
- 338 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C4 (e)
HONDA connector (terminal layout)
- 339 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C5
Connector (Burndy Japan)(3 pins/brown)
- 340 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C6
Connector for HIROSE flat cable
- 341 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C7 (a)
Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
- 342 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C7 (b)
Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
- 343 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C8 (a)
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface
Fig.C8 (b)
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector
- 344 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Fig.C9
Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board)
- 345 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig.C10
AMP connector (for loader I/O board)
Fig.C11
Faston terminal
- 346 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
B.20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B
B.1
B.1.1
20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS
Vertical-type Connectors
Models: PCR-EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin) 52618-2011 (Molex Japan) These board-mounted connectors have been specially developed to achieve the high packing density required for FANUC products. As explained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors can be used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the newly developed connectors is compatible with that of the Honda PCR series connectors. To support this specification extensively, many connector manufacturers are now developing custom-tailored cable connectors. (Note that these cables cannot be used with screw-fixing cable connector housings.)
B.1.2
Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw-fixing Connector Housings)
Models: PCR-E20MDK-SL-A (Honda Tsushin) (straight connector) PCR-E20LMDETZ-SL (Honda Tsushin) (right-angled connector) These connectors are used for the main and option boards. As cable connectors, they are compatible with screw-fixing connector housings as well as the spring locking connector housings.
B.2
CABLE CONNECTORS
Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. The models listed below are available. Those connectors not marked with an asterisk are currently being mass-produced as manufacturer's standard models. Those marked with an asterisk are produced according to custom specifications by FANUC.
- 347 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Fig. B.2 Cable connectors
B.2.1
Strand Wire Press-mount Connector
With this connector, #28AWG wires are press-connected to each pin at the same time. The cost of producing a cable/connector assembly with this connector model is much lower than with connectors designed for crimping or soldering.
Connector model (manufacturer) FI-20-CV7 (Hirose) Supplementary description Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housing can be fastened to a board-mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It is intended mainly for connecting the board-mounted connectors used on the main and option boards of the LCD-mounted type (see Section B.1.2). Note that this connector housing cannot be used for conventional board-mounted connectors.
B.2.2
Soldering Type Connector
Details of soldering type connectors and their housings are summarized below.
Table B.2 Details of soldering type connectors and housings Connector model (manufacturer) PCR-E20FS (Honda) FI40-20S (Hirose) FI40B-20S (Hirose) (formerly, FI40A-20S) Supplementary description Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cable assemblies in small quantities, as well as on-site. Equivalent to Honda PCR-E20FS Has the same number of pins as the FI40-20S, but features a wider soldering pitch, facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced pins allow wires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B-20S (wires no thicker than #20AWG can be used with the FI40A-20S). Note, however, that a thick wire, such as #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the FI-20-CV6.
- 348 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Connector model (manufacturer) FI40B-2015S (Hirose) (formerly, FI40-2015S)
Supplementary description Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by thinning out some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its predecessor, the FI40-2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as #17AWG, provided that the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.
Housing model (manufacturer) FI-20-CV5 (Hirose) FI-20-CV6 (Hirose)
Supplementary description Should be used with the FI40B-20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use with a cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter. Should be used with the FI40B-20S. This housing, however, can be used with a thicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI-20-CV5. Its components are die cast.
In addition to the combinations shown in Fig. B.2, Hirose soldering-type connectors can be combined with the housings listed below. Ensure that the diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies the requirements of that housing.
Connector model FI40B-2015S (formerly FI40-2015S) FI40-20S FI40B-20S (formerly FI40A-20S) Housing model (applicable cable diameter) FI-20-CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only
FI-20-CV2 (6.2mm) FI-20-CV5 (9.2mm) FI-20-CV6 (10.25mm)
Those listed on the left can be used.
B.3
RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES
Table B.3 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables Compatible cable (cable diameter) FANUC-approved FANUC-approved Connector name FANUC development housing connector referenced in the FANUC specification (manufacturer) (manufacturer) Connection Manual number PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020-G/E (Fujitsu Takamizawa) 52622-2011 (Molex) FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) PCR-E20FS (Honda Tsushin) FI40-20S (Hirose Electric) FI40B-2015S (formerly FI40-2015S) (Hirose Electric) PCR-V20LA (Honda Tsushin) FI-20-CV2 (Hirose Electric) FCN-240C020-Y/S (Fujitsu Takamizawa) A66L-0001-0284#10P 52624-2015 (Molex) (6.2 mm in diameter) FI-20-CV7 (Hirose Electric) PCR-V20LA (Honda Tsushin) FI-20-CV2 (Hirose Electric) FI-20-CV (Hirose Electric)
Remark
Plastic housing Metal housing Plastic housing Plastic housing Plastic housing Plastic housing Plastic housing
PCR-E20FA Strand wire press-mount type
PCR-E20FA Strand wire press-mount type PCR-E20FS Soldering type FI40B-2015S (formerly FI40-2015S) 15-pin soldering type
A66L-0001-0286 (Note) A66L-0001-0402 (Note) Plastic housing (8.5 mm in diameter)
- 349 -

Connector name referenced in the Connection Manual FI40B-20S (formerly FI40A-2015S) Soldering type FANUC-approved connector (manufacturer) FI40B-20S (formerly FI40A-205) (Hirose Electric) FI40B-20S (Hirose Electric)
APPENDIX Compatible cable (cable diameter) FANUC development FANUC specification number
B-63943EN/03
FANUC-approved housing (manufacturer) FI-20-CV5 (Hirose Electric) FI-20-CV6 (Hirose Electric)
Remark
A66L-0001-0367 A66L-0001-0368 Plastic housing (9.2 mm in diameter) A66L-0001-0403 (Note) Metal housing (9.8 mm in diameter)
NOTE Cable A66L-0001-0286 has been recommended for use as a pulse coder cable. It can be up to 20 m long. Two cables, A66L-0001-0402 and A66L-0001-0403, have recently been developed. A66L-0001-0402 and A66L-0001-0403 can be as long as 30 m and 50 m, respectively. (See Fig. 2 for detailed specifications.) Both cables have the same level of oil and bending resistance (cable, 100 mm in diameter, capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles) as conventional cables, and are UL- and CSA-certified.
B.3.1
Recommended Connectors
FANUC-approved connector (manufacturer) PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin)
Press-mount type connector assembly tools and jigs

Connector model referenced in the Connection Manual PCR-E20FA Wire forming tool PCS-K2A JGPS-015-1/1-20 JGPS-014 FHAT-918A FI30-20CAT FI30-20CAT1 FCN-237T-T043/H FCN-237T-T044/H FCN-237T-T062/H 57829-5000 57823-5000 Press-mounting tool FHPT-918A MFC-K1 PCS-K1 FI30-20/ID HHP-502 FI30-20GP FCN-237T-T109/H FCN-247T-T066/H Remark Low cost (Note 1)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric) FCN-247J020 -G/S (Fujitsu)
Low cost
52622-2011 (Molex)
57830-5000 57824-5000
Low cost
NOTE 1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification number A02B-0120-K391). 2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with the connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.
B.3.2
Applicable Cables
Materials for cable assemblies

Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure the materials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products. FANUC recommends the following materials as being suitable for interface connectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contact each cable manufacturer for themselves, as required.
- 350 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX

Manufacturer Hitachi Cable, Ltd. Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. Hitachi Cable, Ltd. Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Remark
Material 10-pair cable
Use General use
Constitution 0.08mm2 10-pair
FANUC specification number A66L-0001-0284 #10P
12-conductor composite cable
Pulse coder, linear scale, manual pulse generator
0.5mm2 6-conductor 0.18mm2 3-pair 0.75mm2 6-conductor 0.18mm2 3-pair 1.25mm2 6-conductor 0.18mm2 3-pair 5-conductor coaxial
A66L-0001-0286
20 m or less
A66L-0001-0402
A66L-0001-0403
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
5-core coaxial cable
CRT interface
A66L-0001-0371
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
30 m or less Usable on movable parts 50 m or less Usable on movable parts 50 m or less
10-pair cable
(a) Specifications
Item Product No. Manufacturer Unit Specifications A66L-0001-0284#10P Hitachi Cable,Ltd. Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd. SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. 60C 30V : UL2789 80C 30V : UL80276 Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B-286) Cross-linked vinyl Tinned annealed copper wire Heat-resistant oilproof vinyl 10 28 7/0.127 0.38 0.1 Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm) 0.58 UL15157(80C , 30V) 1.16 20 or less Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, then wrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round, apply a cable separator as required. 3.5
Rating Material Conductor Insulator Shield braid Sheath Number of pairs Conductor Size Structure Outside diameter Thickness Outside diameter (approx.) Core style (rating) Outside diameter (approx.) Pitch
Pairs AWG Conductors/mm mm mm mm mm mm mm -
Insulator
Twisted pair
Lay
Lay diameter (approx.)
mm
- 351 -

Item Drain wire
APPENDIX Unit Conductors/mm Specifications
B-63943EN/03
Shield braid Sheath
Element wire diameter Braid density Color Thickness Outside diameter (approx.)
mm % mm mm m /km M-km V/min. -
Hitachi Cable : Not available Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12 SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. : Not available 0.12 85 or more Black 1.0 6.2 200 Bundle 233 or less 10 or less 300 Shall pass flame resistance test VW-1SC of UL standards.
Standard length Packing method Electrical performance
Electric resistance (at 20C ) Insulation resistance (at 20C ) Dielectric strength (AC)
Flame resistance
(b) Structure drawing
Composite 12-core cable

(a) Specifications
Item Product No. Manufacturer Unit Specifications A66L-0001-0286 Oki Cable, Ltd. Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd. SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. 80C, 30V
Rating
- 352 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX Item Unit Cores

Specifications Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152) Heat-resistant flame-retardant vinyl Oilproof, heat-resistant, flame-retardant vinyl 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs) (7 to 9) 0.5 0.18 20/0.18 7/0.18 0.94 0.54 0.25 0.2
Material
Conductor,braid-shielded wire,drain wire Insulator Sheath Number of wires (wire ons.) Conductor Size Structure Outside diameter Standard thickness (The minimum thickness is at least 80% of the standard thickness.) Outside diameter Outside diameter Direction of lay Pitch
Insulator
mm2 Conductors/mm mm mm
Twisted pair
Lay
mm mm mm -
Lay diameter (approx.) Drain wire Size Structure Outside diameter Shield braid Element wire diameter Thickness Braid density Outside diameter Sheath Color Standard thickness (The minimum thickness is at least 85% of the standard thickness.) Outside diameter Standard length Packing method Electrical Electric resistance (at performance 20C) (wire nos.) Insulation resistance (at 20C) Dielectric strength (AC) Flame resistance
mm mm2 Wires/mm mm mm mm % mm mm
0.94 1.88 Left 20 or less Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer is right-twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer. Apply a cable separator as required. 5.7 0.3 12/0.18 0.72 0.12 0.3 70 6.3 Black 1.1
1.50
mm m /km M-km V/min. -
8.5Max. 9.0 (Note) 100 Bundle 39.4 (1 to 6) 113 (7 to 9) 15 500 Shall pass flame resistance test VW-1SC of UL standards.
NOTE The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than the drain wire.
- 353 -

(b) Cable structure The cable structure is shown below.
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
(c) Specifications
Item FANUC specification number Manufacturer Conductor Constitution Number of conductors/ mm Typical outside diameter (mm) Color Typical thickness (mm) Typical outside diameter (mm) Constitution Specification A66L-0001-0402 A66L-0001-0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. A-conductor B-conductor A-conductor B-conductor 16/0.12 3/22/0.12 16/0.12 7/16/0.12 (0.18mm2) (0.75mm2) (0.18mm2) (1.25mm2) 0.55 White, red, black 0.16 0.87 White-red, white-black, and black-red Left Typical pitch: 20 mm 3 1.20 Red, black 0.23 1.66 0.55 White, red, black 0.16 0.87 White-red, white-black, and black-red Left Typical pitch: 20 mm 3 1.70 Red, black 0.25 2.20
Insulation (polyester)
Pair twisting
Direction of twisting
Assembling by twisting
Number of strands or conductors Direction of twisting Taping Typical outside diameter (mm) Typical strand diameter (mm) Typical density (mm) Drain Typical outside diameter (mm)
Left Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Japanese paper, tape. 5.7
Left Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Japanese paper, tape. 6.9
Braided shielding
0.14 80 A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding. 6.4 7.6
- 354 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX Item

Specification Black (matted)
Sheath (polyurethane)
Finished assembly Finished assembly performance Electrical performance
Color Typical thickness (mm) Vertical taping Outside diameter (mm) Typical length (m) Short size Rating Standard Flame resistance Conductor resistance /km (20C) Insulation resistance M/km (20C) Dielectric strength V-min Tensile strength N/mm2 Elongation % Tensile strength after aging % Elongation after aging % Aging condition Tensile strength N/mm2 Elongation % Tensile strength after aging % Elongation after aging % Aging condition
1.05
1.1
Vertically taped with washi under sheathing. 8.50.3 9.80.3 100 Basically not approved. 80C 30V Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80C 30V FT-1. Shall comply with VW-1 and FT-1. 103 or lower 25.5 or lower 103 or lower 15.0 or lower 1 or higher A.C 500 9.8 or higher 100 or higher At least 70% of that before aging At least 65% of that before aging For 168 hours at 113C 9.8 or higher 100 or higher At least 70% of that before aging At least 65% of that before aging For 168 hours at 113C
Insulation performance
Sheathing performance
Cable cross section
5-core coaxial cable

(a) Specifications
Item Specification Manufacture Number of Conductors Unit Core Description A66L-0001-0371 HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD. 5
- 355 -

Item Inside Conductor Size Components Material Diameter (approx.) Insulator Material (Color) Thickness Diameter (approx.) Outside Material Conductor Diameter of Component-Wire Density Thickness Jacket Material Color Thickness Diameter (approx.) Twisted Assembly Diameter (approx.) Thickness of Paper Tape Shield braid Wire dia. Material Density Thickness Diameter Sheath Material, Color Thickness Finish Diameter Conductor Resistance (20C) Dielectric strength (between internal conductor and external conductor) Insulation resistance (between internal conductor and external conductor, 20C) Impedance (10MHz) Standard Capacitance (1MHz) Standard Attention Weight Standard Length Package form
APPENDIX Unit Description
B-63943EN/03
mm2 Conductors(PCS)/mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm /km -
0.14 7/0.16 Tin-coated Soft Copper Wire 0.48 Polyethylene (White), heat-resistant 80C 0.71 1.90 Tin-coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled) 0.08 95 or more 0.2 Vinyl, heat-resistant 80C Black. White. Red. Green. Blue 0.15 2.6 7.1 0.05 0.12 (Tin-coaded soft copper wire) 80 or more (typ 82%) 0.3 7.8 Oil Tight Vinyl (A), Black, heat-resistant 80C 0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56) 9.20.3 143 or less 1000 VAC must be withstood for one minute.
M-km
1000 or more
nF/km dB/km kg/km m -
755 56 53 105 200 Bundle
- 356 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
An example of circuit testing 20-pin interface cable
Resistor
Check every pin
Cable (20-pin interface connector)
PCB connector
PCR-E20LMD-SL (Honda) Available from general manufacturers
- 357 -
C.CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
C
MDI cable
CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)

Cable type Use and condition Control unit-to-MDI unit Electrical cable Electrical-to-optical conversion adapter Optical cable Electrical cable (control unit-to-spindle servo unit) Electrical-to-optical conversion adapter Optical cable Control unit-position coder Connector panel I/O operator's panel I/O module-to-manual pulse generator See APPENDIX D. See APPENDIX D. 4800 baud or less 9600 baud or less 9600 baud or less 19.2 k baud Maximum cable length (m) 20m 10m (Note 2) 2m 200m 20m 2m 200m 50m 50m
Maximum allowable cable length between units
I/O Link cable
Serial spindle cable Position coder cable MPG cable FSSB cable HSSB cable RS-232-C communication cable RS-422 communication cable
100m 50m 800m 50m
NOTE 1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when the respective recommended cables stated in the text are used. If a non-recommended cable is used, the maximum cable length may not be guaranteed. Cables other than those listed above are used between units in the 30i series. See the respective descriptions in this manual for details of these cables. 2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used within the cabinet.
Purpose Spindle signal cable (when 3 or 4 serial spindles are connected) Electrical-to-electrical Spindle signal cable (when 3 or 4 serial spindles are connected) When an electrical-tooptical conversion adapter is used
FI-20-CV7
Description
PCR-E20FA
Specification
Length
A02B-0236-K845
5m
PCR-E20FA
A02B-0236-K847
FI-20-CV7
1m
Power supply cable for I/O unit Control unit (CP1B) I/O Unit (CP31)
AMP2-178288-3
A02B-0236-K843
SMS3PNS-5
5m
- 358 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX Description
FI-20-CV7

Specification Length
Purpose
MDI signal cable LCD-mounted type control unit or stand-alone type LCD unit (CA55) MDI unit (CK1) Power supply cable for stand-alone type LCD unit stand-alone type MDI (CPD2) Stand-alone type LCD (CP5)
Manual pulse generator cable (for one unit) Control unit (JA3)
A02B-0236-K812
25cm
LY10-DC20
A02B-0236-K813
45cm
AMP2-178288-3
A02B-0166-K880
AMP1-178288-3
55cm
FI40-2015S

Manual pulse generator terminal board Manual pulse generator cable (for two units) Control unit (JA3)
FI40-2015S
A02B-0120-K847
M3 crimp style terminal
7m

Manual pulse generator terminal board Manual pulse generator cable (for three units) Control unit (JA3)
FI40-2015S
A02B-0120-K848
7m

Manual pulse generator terminal board I/O Link cable Control unit (JD1A)
A02B-0120-K841
2 2 2 2
7m

I/O unit (JD1B)
A02B-0120-K842
PCR-E20FA
5m
- 359 -

Purpose Control unit power supply cable Stabilized power supply (24 VDC)
APPENDIX Description Specification
B-63943EN/03
Length
A02B-0124-K830
AMP1-178288-3
5m

Control unit (CP1A) Serial spindle signal cable Control unit (JA41)

Electric/optical converter Serial spindle signal cable Control unit (JA41)
A02B-0120-K844
PCR-E20FA
1m

series amplifier (JA7B) I/O Link i or I/O Link cable Control unit (JD51A)
A02B-0200-K810
PCR-E20FA
5m
A02B-0236-K848 I/O Link signal divider (2 channels) (JD44B) I/O Link i or I/O Link cable Control unit (JD1A) A02B-0303-K849 I/O Link signal divider (3 channels) (JD1B)
PCR-E20FA PCR-E20FA
1m
1m
- 360 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
The 30i series uses optical fiber cables for the following interfaces. This table lists the usable combinations.
Interface Serial spindle interface *1 I/O Link interface *1 High-speed serial bus (HSSB) interface Between stand-alone control unit and LCD Serial servo bus (FSSB) interface Junction None Provided None Provided None None None Provided Provided None None None Recommended optical cable A66L-6001-0026#L~ A66L-6001-0029#L~ A66L-6001-0026#L~ A66L-6001-0026#L~ A66L-6001-0023#L~ A66L-6001-0026#L~ A66L-6001-0049#L~ A66L-6001-0029#L~ A66L-6001-0049#L~ A66L-6001-0023#L~ A66L-6001-0026#L~ A66L-6001-0049#L~ Maximum allowable transmission distance 100m 55m *2 200m 100m *2 10m 50m 100m 35m *2 55m *2 10m 50m *3 100m *3 Applicable junction adapter A63L-0020-0004 A63L-0020-0002
A63L-0020-0004 A63L-0020-0004
CAUTION 1 When an optical fiber cable is used for connection. 2 Only one junction point is permitted. Make a junction so that the sum of the line length of two optical cables is within the range of the maximum allowable transmission distance. The two optical cables must be the same type. 3 There are some cable length restrictions on FSSB. Please note the following: The cable length between the CNC and the first slave unit is: 50 m or less with A66L-6001-0026#L 100 m or less with A66L-6001-0049#L The cable length between slave units is 40 m or less. The total cable length is 500 m or less per one FSSB line.
Notes on the specifications of optical fiber cable

(1) Supported optical cables
<1> Internal cord type cable A66L-6001-0023#LxRxxx Cable length 0.15 to 10m Code diameter 2.2mm 2 cords Tensile strength Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cord Between optical fiber cord and connector 2kg Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord 25mm Operating temperature-20 to 70 C
- 361 -

7 6.7 14 max.
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
Unit: mm
100 typ.
Two cords are bound together.
21 Code
Fig. D (a) External dimensions of internal cord type cable
<2> External type cable A66L-6001-0026#LxRxxx A66L-6001-0029#LxRxxx Cable length 1 to 200m Optical fiber cord diameter 2.2mm 2 cords Diameter of cable with reinforced cover 7.6mm Tensile strength Cable with reinforced cover75kg Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cord Between optical fiber cord and connector2kg Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord 25mm Minimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover 50mm Bending resistance (cable with reinforced cover) 10 million bending cycles at room temperature (when the bending radius is 100 mm) Flame resistance Equivalent to UL VW-1 Operating temperature-20 to 70 C
Unit: mm 8.2 6.7 19 max. 150 typ. 35 typ.
21 Code Bush
Reinforced cover
Fig. D (b) External dimensions of external cable Table D (a) Standard cable length Internal cord type cable External cable A66L-6001-0023 A66L-6001-0026# Specification Length Specification Length L150R0 L300R0 L500R0 L1R003 L2R003 L3R003 L5R003 L7R003 L10R03 0.15m 0.3 m 0.5 m 1.0 m 2.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m 7.0 m 10.0 m L1R003 L2R003 L3R003 L5R003 L7R003 L10R03 L15R03 L20R03 L30R03 L50R03 L100R03 1.0 m 2.0 m 3.0 m 5.0 m 7.0 m 10.0m 15.0m 20.0m 30.0m 50.0m 100m
- 362 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX

External cable A66L-6001-0026# Specification Length L200R03 200m
Internal cord type cable A66L-6001-0023 Specification Length
(2) Cable selection

Always use an external cable (A66L-6001-0026#~) when the cable is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or main unit cabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on. Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject to movement. For example, when connecting a movable portable operation pendant box to the power magnetics cabinet, the use of an external cable is desirable because the cable is likely to be bent, pulled, or twisted repeatedly even though frequent system operation is not expected. However, the force likely to be applied when the cable is installed or moved for maintenance purposes does not need to be taken into consideration. Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are a danger. Although the internal cord type cable (A66L-6001-0023#~) is covered by nonflammable resin, the cover, if exposed to frame for a long time, may melt, allowing the fiber cable inside to burn. Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled with considerable force during installation (the force applied to the cable must be within the specified tensile strength limit at all times). For example, even though installing a cable in a cable duct can be regarded as internal cabling, a cable of the appropriate type must be selected according to the tensile force to be applied to the cable during installation. Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oil and heat resistance properties.
(3) Procuring the cable

All the optical fiber cables mentioned above are special cable products with optical connectors, which are designed, produced, and tested to ensure the required system performance and reliability. It is technically impossible for users to produce these cables or process (cut and reconnect) them after purchase. Users are requested to purchase cables of the necessary length from an appropriate supplier. Cables are available from either FANUC or any of the FANUC-approved manufacturers listed in Table D(d).
Table D(d) FANUC-approved cable manufacturers and cable model numbers (retail)
<1> Internal cord type cable : A66L-6001-0023#LxRxxx

Manufacturer Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Model number *-353373-* PF-2HB209-**M-F-1 H07-P22-F2VCFA-** Remark ** indicates the cable length (m). ** indicates the cable length (m).
<2> External Cable : A66L-6001-0026#LxRxxx

Manufacturer Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Model number *-353199-* CF-2HB208-**M-F-1 H07-P22-F2NCFA-** OPC201HPXF-**MB Remark ** indicates the cable length (m). ** indicates the cable length (m). ** indicates the cable length (m).
(4) Handling precautions

<1> Protection during storage When the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on the printed circuit board and the optical fiber cable are not in use, their mating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with which they are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces are likely to become dirty, possibly resulting in a poor cable connection.
- 363 -

Electrical/optical conversion module
APPENDIX
Lid
B-63943EN/03
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable caps
Fig. D (c) Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical fiber cable (when not in use)
<2> Optical fiber cable Make sure that the bending radius and tensile strength of the cable are always within their ranges described in the specifications (see the first item), regardless of whether the cable is stored or routed and whether operation is in progress or not. Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has sufficient mechanical strength, be careful not to drop heavy objects on the cable. Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting or disconnecting the cable. Do not pull on the optical fiber cord itself. (The maximum tensile strength between the fiber cord and connector is 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely to cause the connector to come off, making the cable unusable.) Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked by the lock levers on its top. To remove the connector, release the lock levers and pull the connector. Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than the correct orientation, always take note of the connector's orientation before making the connection. Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook or a tension member to the reinforcing cover of the optical connector and pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig. D(d). This is done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber cord and connector. If no tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector when installing the cable, you can hold the reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In the case of an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcing cover, apply the same protective measures, as instructed in Fig. D(d), for that portion of the cable where the two cords are bound together, in order to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber cord and connector. In the same way as for an external cable, if no tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector during installation, you can hold the shielded part of the cable directly and pull it. Because the combined tensile strength of the two cords is only 14 kg, however, avoid applying too great a force to the cable during installation, regardless of whether you have taken the protective measures.
- 364 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
Optical connector

Reinforcing cover Optical connector
Reinforcing cover
Wire with a hook Tension member
Tape
Tape
2 cords combined
Fig. D (d) Prior to installing a cable
Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side and PCB side) clean. If they become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper or absorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper or absorbent cotton may be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solvent other than ethyl alcohol. Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord binding portion of the internal cord type cable by using a cable clamp, as shown in Fig. D(e), to prevent the weight of the optical fiber cable from being applied directly to the connecting part of the optical connector. (Recommended cable clamp) Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clamp that grasps the optical cable lightly; the clamp should not apply excessive pressure to the cable. For an external cable CKN-13SP (with sponge) (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.) For an internal cord type cable MN-1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
Optical connector Optical fiber cord Reinforcing cover of external cable or cord binding portion of internal cord type cable
Bending radius of 25 mm or more (Make the bending radius as large as possible.) Cable clamp Bending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover) Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion) (Make the bending radius as large as possible.)
Fig. D(e) Fixing the cable with a clamp
Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into a loops. Should this prove necessary, make sure the diameter of each loop is at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100 mm (for an internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loops may produce sharp curves that exceed the specified bending radius limit without the user being aware. Such bending can result in a greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to a communication failure. When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow the instructions given below. Also, take care not to apply a bending force to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a clamp. Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.
- 365 -
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
(External cable) Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band. When clamping the cable by the reinforcing cover, the clamping force is not an important factor to consider. However, ensure that the clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that the reinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, the clamping force should be 5 kg or less. (Internal cord type cable) Lightly clamp the optical cable with a nylon band so that the cable shield is not deformed. If possible, the clamping force should be 1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to the cable). Due care is required when clamping the internal cord type cable because its cable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the external cable.
(5) Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC I/O Link

When used for the FANUC I/O Link application, optical fiber cables can be connected by using an optical fiber adapter, as follows. (a) External view of an optical fiber adapter
320.3 10.16 R1.6 6.6 210.5 3.2 420.5
(b) Example of the use of an optical fiber adapter

Optical fiber adapter (A63L-0020-0002)
Optical fiber cable
18.20.5
Optical fiber cable Mounting board
NOTE Up to one relay points are permitted.

- 366 -
2.2
8.2
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
(6) Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC high-speed serial bus

With the FANUC high-speed serial bus, special low-loss optical cables can be connected by using a special low-loss optical relay adapter as an optical fiber relay adapter. (a) External view of the low-loss optical relay adapter
320.5 10.16 R1.6 6.6 210.3 3.2 421.0
(b) Example of use of the optical fiber relay adapter

Low-loss optical relay adapter (A63L-0020-0004)
Low-loss optical fiber cable
18.1
2.2
Low-loss optical fiber cable
Mounting board
NOTE Only one relay point is permitted. (7) Precautions for connection with low-loss optical junction adapter
Features and attention in use of low-loss optical junction adapter (A63L-0020-0004) When optical connectors for a conventional optical junction adapter (A63L-0020-0002) are jointed, the facing ferrules(Note 1) are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the optical fiber of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables (A66L-6001-0008, -0009, -0026) may protrude from the tip of the ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the fiber protrusion being damaged when the ferrules are butted against each other. In the low-loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are butted against each other, thus greatly reducing the reduction in repeater loss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low-loss optical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.
- 367 -
8.2
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable (A66L-6001-0008, -0009, -0026) is used as even one of the two optical fiber cables for joining the low-loss optical junction adapter, both cables may be damaged, resulting in deteriorated characteristics.
NOTE Ferrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; the fiber is bonded to the ferrule.
Ferrule Protective cover
Optical cable Optical connector
Features of low-loss optical cable (A66L-6001-0029#~) A low-loss optical cable is selected from conventional PCF optical cables (A66L-6601-0026). The selected cable offers low loss, and its connector section is given special treatment; the fiber ends are provided with a depression so that the ferrules can be butted against each other. The two optical cables used with the low-loss optical junction adapter must be of low-loss type. Features of high-speed low-loss optical cables (A66L-6001-0049#~) To support high-speed long-distance communication, a high-speed low-loss optical cable uses the type of optical fiber that has optical properties different from those of optical fibers in conventional PCF optical cables (A66L-6001-0026, A66L-6001-0029), enabling optical propagation differently. If different types of optical fiber cables are connected to make a junction, junction loss may increase, possibly causing a failure of optical communication. When using a low-loss optical junction adapter, be sure to use two optical cables of the same type (two high-speed low-loss optical cables or two low-loss optical cables). Designs (differentiations) of low-loss junction adapters, low-loss optical cables, and high-speed low-loss optical cables A conventional optical junction adapter has a black body, while a low-loss optical junction adapter has a blue body. A conventional PCF optical cable has a black protective cover (see the above figure), while a low-loss optical cable has a blue protective cover, and a high-speed low-loss optical cable has a yellow protective cover.
(8) Installing the optical fiber junction adapter

The optical fiber junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet, as a rule. If it is impossible to avoid installing it within a cabinet, protect the adapter and the optical cable portions (such as connectors and cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside air by, for example, covering them with packing.
(9) Environmental resistance of the optical fiber junction adapter

The optical fiber junction adapter is not waterproof. Even when optical cables are attached to both ends of the adapter, there are very small gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not be expected.
- 368 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
When optical cables are attached to both ends of the junction adapter installed in a normal environment (such as within a cabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the adapter and optical fiber to the degree that it may hamper normal optical linkage. If one or both ends of the adapter are left open, dust and dirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a normal environment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and dirt on the adapter ends is likely to hamper normal optical linkage when the optical cables are attached. In such a case, clean the junction adapter and the optical connector using the optical fiber junction adapter cleaning method described below. Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those optical cable portions (such as connectors and cords) that are not covered with reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter and fiber end surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a malfunction may occur.
(10) Cleaning
If the optical fiber junction adapter, optical-to-electrical conversion module, or optical cable are soiled, clean them according to the following procedures. Cleaning the optical fiber junction adapter and optical-to-electrical conversion module First, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistened with, or by washing it in, ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B (alternative CFC; High Shower spray can DS-2168, manufactured by Sun Hayato). Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipe them with a cotton swab or the like. Cleaning optical cables For the optical cables, it is important to clean the connectors at their ends. Any soiling on the optical fiber end surfaces will hamper optical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the optical fiber end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly with a soft, clean cloth (like gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B, in the same way as described above. The use of cotton swabs may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low-loss optical cables are lower than the ferrules. To remove any soiling from the fiber end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab or gauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating the ferrule. If the ferrules and optical connectors are contaminated with oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned fiber end surface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversion module, it is a good idea to wash them before wiping the optical fiber end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.
- 369 -
E.LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
Brightness of the monochrome LCD

When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD decreases. (The LCD screen is dark particularly immediately after the power is turned on.) This phenomenon is not a failure but is a property specific to the LCD. When the ambient temperature increases, the LCD screen becomes brighter. The monochrome LCD has a brightness control function. For the method of adjustment, see Maintenance Manual (B-63945EN).
LCD with a touch panel

The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For this operation, be sure to use a FANUC-supplied pen (A02B-0236-K111) dedicated to the touch panel. If a sharp-pointed pen is used, for example, to touch the LCD screen, the LCD surface may be flawed or damaged. Moreover, do not touch the LCD screen directly with a finger. Otherwise, the operability of the LCD may deteriorate, and the LCD screen may get dirty.
Protection sheet for the touch panel

A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel to protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection sheet is damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a consumable part.)
Replacing the protection sheet

Materials used
(1) Protection sheet : A02B-0236-K110 (2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off = detergent for kitchen can be used) (3) Soft cloth (such as towel)
Replacement procedure
(1) Before replacement <1> Turn off the power to the machine. <2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the touch panel. <3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with alcohol. <4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface of the touch panel. <5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely. If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still left on the surface. Remove oil completely. If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch panel, the protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel completely and will sometimes peel off easily. <6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely. (2) Applying the protection sheet (2-1) For A02B-0236-K110 <1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the backing sheet).
Fold
<2> Peel off the backing sheet. <3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower sides of the sheet first. Check that the sides of the protection sheet do not touch the escutcheon.
- 370 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
E.LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)

NG
OK
<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet while pushing out air between the touch panel and protection sheet. With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the touch panel, do not attempt to correct the position of the protection sheet by pulling the sheet. <5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the entire sheet completely. Check that the four corners and four sides of the protection sheet do not float.
- 371 -
F.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
APPENDIX
B-63943EN/03
F
Overview
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Using the memory card interface located on the left side of the LCD, input/output of data inside the CNC and remote diagnosis using a modem card can be performed. This appendix describes the memory card interface for data input/output. For an explanation of remote diagnosis using a modem card, see the related document.
ATA CARD
1. Compact Flash and ATA Flash cards confirmed to be worked The table below provides a list of Compact Flash and ATA Flash cards that have been confirmed to work with the 30i series. The word and symbols used in the table have the meaning indicated below. Note that the recommended card depends on the application. Available: The card confirmed to be worked by FANUC -: No planning to test CF: Compact Flash (Blank): To be evaluated
Usage Manufacture SanDisk Model SDCFB-128-801 SDCFB-256-801 SDCFB-384-801 SDCFB-512-801 HB28D032C8H HB28B064C8H HB28B128C8H HB28B256C8H HB28D096A8H HB28D160A8H HB28B192A8H HB28B320A8H HB28B640A8H HB28B1000A8H Size 128MB 256MB 384MB 512MB 32MB 64MB 128MB 256MB 96MB 160MB 192MB 320MB 640MB 1GB Data I/O and automatic operation by PCMCIA ports Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Data server Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Remark CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF
HITACHI
Adaptor for Compact Flash cards For confirmation of data input/output operation and automatic operation based on the PCMCIA port, the Compact Flash card adaptor (A02B-0303-K150) is used. For confirmation of data server operation, the adaptor (SDCF-31-03) manufactured by SanDisk Corporation is used.
NOTE 1 If a card other than the above is used, the operation is not guaranteed. 2 The cards for 3.3 V cannot be used. 3 The cards for 5 and 3.3 V (automatic switching) can be used.
2. Miscellaneous The flash ATA card uses a quick format. If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using a personal computer.
- 372 -
B-63943EN/03
APPENDIX
F.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Using the compact flash adapter

1. Attachment Attach the compact flash card to the compact flash card adapter (A02B-0303-K150, called the CF adapter later). Make sure lock lever A is in the upper position and then insert the CF adapter above into the memory card interface. Push lock lever A downward. Close the cover of the memory card interface.
NOTE 1 To perform continuous operation with the CF adapter attached, be sure to push lock lever A downward and then close the cover of the memory card interface. 2 The lock function is enabled only when the CF adapter (A02B-0303-K150) is used. 3 The CF adapter must be inserted with label surface facing toward the screen.
2. Removal Open the cover of the memory card interface. Push lock lever A upward. Push eject button B once to project the button. Push eject button B again to eject the CF adapter. Remove the CF card with your fingers. Close the cover of the memory card interface.
NOTE 4 When lock lever A is in the lower position (in the locked state), eject button B cannot be pushed.
Lock lever A
Eject button B
Compact flash card
Compact flash card adapter
- 373 -
B-63943EN/03
INDEX
INDEX
<Number>
20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES...................................................................347 2A DO (Output Signal) Connection .............................156 2A Output Connector Pin Allocation ...........................155 2A Output DO Signal Specifications ...........................157 Connecting Seven or Eight Serial spindles ....................97 CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT SERIES WITH I/O LINK ........................................211 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit ...28 CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI).........79 Connecting Three to Four Serial Spindles .....................90 CONNECTION.............................................. 130,209,212 Connection Between the Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit and Additional Unit ............126 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit ..................................................................................110 CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) .....358 Connection Diagram ...................................... 148,274,277 CONNECTION FOR Series 300is/310is/320is ...........247 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules...............164 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector ........................................................................... 109,125 CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE.................................................................147 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable .....132 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable ..................................................................................133 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles ....................88 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT) ........................175 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE AND POWER MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE ..........................................................191 Connection of Power Supply ................................ 103,120 CONNECTION TO ATANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL ............................................213 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ............57,252 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link ........................130 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS ................246 Connection to the Ethernet Interface..............................81 Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD-mounted Type 30i Series).........................................................................57 CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS.........98 CONNECTION USING Ethernet ................................277 CONNECTION USING THE HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) ............................................................273 Connection when Multiple Channels of FANUC I/O Links are Used..........................................................136 Connection with an LCD Unit .......................................62 CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS.........273 CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES ...68 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT (LCD-MOUNTED TYPE 30i SERIES) .....................57 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNIT (STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES) ......................61 Connection with the Standard MDI Unit .......................58 Connector (on the cable side) specifications................224 Connector Locations ............................................. 111,126 Connector locations of main panel...............................230
<A>
Address Assignment by Ladder ...................................212 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation .......................158 ANALOG INPUT SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE ............................................................116 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface (Analog 1Vp-p Interface) .......................................................122 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification.............................................................119 Analog Input Signal Connections.................................159 Analog Input Signal Specifications..............................160 Analog Input Specifications .........................................160 Anti-Noise Measure .......................................................85 Applicable Cables ........................................................350
<B>
Backup Unit .................................................................253 BATTERIES ..................................................................48 Batteries for PANEL i (3VDC) ......................................53 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC).......................................................................56 Battery for Memory Backup in the CNC Control Unit (3 VDC) ..........................................................................48 Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC).....54 BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS .......................347 Buzzer Output ..............................................................271
<C>
Cabinet ...........................................................................24 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing...............................33 Cable Connection .........................................................276 CABLE CONNECTORS .............................................347 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT ....................................................................................47 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator ...................163 CAUTIONS .................................................................273 CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTI-PATH CONTROL ......245 CAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL POWER MAGNETICS CABINETS ........................................18 CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES..........................a-1 CONFIGURATION ..................................................1,147 Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units......1 Configurations of Optional Boards ..................................8 Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units..........4 Connecting Five or Six Serial Spindles..........................96 Connecting I/O Devices .................................................69
i-1
INDEX
Connector Names and Connector Layout.....................249 CONTROL UNIT ..........................................................37 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES ..............................................1 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE AND GROUNDING............................................................22
B-63943EN/03
<D>
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ........................................................................s-1 Detachable key top.......................................................233 DI (General-purpose Input Signal) Connection.....178,194 DI (Input Signal) Connection .......................................151 DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection ...........................179 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement......................177,193 DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment...............................150 DI/DO Signal Specifications ........................................154 Display Unit for is Series .............................................250 Display Unit for is Series CNC (Stand-Alone Type) ...248 Distribution I/O Setting................................................172 DO (Output Signal) Connection.....................153,181,198 DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES ...................................................39
I/O link connection ......................................................217 I/O Link interface.........................................................209 I/O Mapping.................................................................226 Input Signal Requirements (Parallel interface) ............107 Input Signal Rules for the High-speed Skip (HDI) ........80 Input Signal Specifications ..........................................123 INSTALLATION...................................... 16,112,127,249 Installation Conditions of the Control Unit....................17 Installation Environment..............................................275 Installing the display unit...............................................68 Installing the LCD-mounted Type Control Unit ............37 Installing the Stand-alone Type Control Unit ................38 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers ...................................99
<K>
Key Layout of MDI .......................................................59 Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel ..232 Keyboard of main panel...............................................225
<L>
LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview .................10 LCD-mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is..............249 LCD-Mounted Type Series 300is/310is/320is Control Unit...........................................................................247 Lightning Surge Absorber Installation ...........................36 Linking The EMBEDDED Ethernet Interface ...............81 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)........................370
<E>
Each connection .............................................................64 Each Connections.........................................................215 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL...................................240 Emergency stop signal connection ...............................218 Environmental Conditions for Control Units ...............250 Environmental Conditions outside the Cabinet ..............16 Environmental requirement..........................................231 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET ..........................................................16 Ethernet Interface (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX)...........257 External 24 VDC Power Specification and Circuit Configuration..............................................................42 External View .......................................................185,200
<M>
Main panel specification ..............................................231 Main Power Input.........................................................252 Maintenance Parts ........................................................237 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....... 162,184,199,222 Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected .....212 Meaning of key symbols ..............................................232 MEMORY CARD INTERFACE.................................372 Method for Checking the Encoder Signals...................124 Module Installation ......................................................165 Module Specifications..................................................148
<F>
FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT ..................205
<N>
Network Installation.......................................................85 Noise Suppressor............................................................32 Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit 113 Notes on Installing an Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit ...........................................................128
<G>
GENERAL .....................................................................42 General-purpose DI signal connection .........................219 General-purpose DI signal definition ...........................232 General-purpose DO signal connection........................221 General-purpose DO signal definition..........................232 Grounding as Noise Suppression Measures ...................23 Grounding methods ........................................................23
<O>
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE ..........................................361 Order specification.......................................................231 Other Notes ............................................. 169,187,202,237 Others...........................................................................234 Outline .........................................................................227 OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS ...........................281 Outline of main panel...................................................227 Outline of sub panel A .................................................228 Outline of sub panel D .................................................229 Overall Connection Diagram ................................ 175,191 Override signals ...........................................................226
<H>
Handling Precautions ...................................................275 HARDWARE OVERVIEW...........................................10 Heat Output of Each Unit...............................................20 High-speed Serial Bus (HSSB) [For Stand-alone Type]271
<I>
I/O Address ..................................................................225
i-2
B-63943EN/03
INDEX
<T>
Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic Cabinet .......................................................................20 Thermal Design of Operator's Panel ..............................21 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET.............................................19 TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS AND GROUND TERMINALS..................................39 Total Connection Diagram...........................................214 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS...................12,247 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT.......................................................42
Overview........ 57,61,68,99,117,130,205,211,213,273,277
<P>
PANEL i.......................................................................278 Pin assignment .............................................................215 Power Connection .................................................176,192 Power ON/OFF control signal connection ...................218 Power Supply Capacities of CNC-related Units.............17 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY ..............................17,251 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ........................42,216 Power Supply for the Control Unit.................................42 Power supply specification...........................................231 Power-off Sequence .......................................................46 Power-on Sequence ........................................................46 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1 Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface Boards.......................................................................275 Protective Ground (Grounding for Protection against Indirect Contact).........................................................27
<U>
UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O Link .....................................................146 USB port (front side)....................................................270 USB port (rear side) .....................................................268
<V> <R>
Recommended Connectors...........................................350 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES ...................................349 Replacing the lithium battery .........................................49 RS-232-C Interface Specification ..................................72 RS-232-C Serial Port......................................................70 Vertical-type Connectors .............................................347
<W>
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING ............................................................. s-4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING....... s-2 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE ................ s-5 With Two Display Units ................................................64
<S>
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE .....................101 Separate Detector Interface (Parallel interface) ...........106 Separate Detector Interface (Serial Interface) ..............105 Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ............103 Separating Signal Lines..................................................31 Serial port 1..................................................................264 Serial port 2..................................................................266 Serial Port and USB Port..............................................264 SERIAL SPINDLE ........................................................88 SERVO INTERFACE....................................................98 SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER...................238 Soldering Type Connector ...........................................348 Specification.................................................................206 Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable...............................83 Specifications .................................................186,201,231 Specifications of a Commercial PC..............................274 SPINDLE CONNECTION.............................................87 Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview......................11 STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP ..............................238 STOP MODES .............................................................238 STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR.............................239 STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR .........................239 Straight and Right-angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw-fixing Connector Housings) ..........................347 Strand Wire Press-mount Connector ............................348 Sub panel A/D specification.........................................231
i-3
B-63943EN/03
REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition 03 Date May., 2011 Total revision Addition of functions Addition of following models - Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A5 - Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A - Series 32i /320i /320is-MODEL A Contents
02
May, 2004
01
Apr., 2003
r-1

B-63943en 03 110525

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

B-63943en 03 110525

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

FANUC Series 30+-MODEL A FANUC Series 31+-MODEL A FANUC Series 32+-MODEL A

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)

CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES

CHANGE IN CNC MODEL NAMES

Series 31i (Series 310is)

Series 32i (Series 320i) Series 32i (Series 320is)

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE

Organization of this manuals

Chapter 4 POWER SUPPLAY CONNECTION Chapter 5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIOHERALS

Chapter 6 SPINDLE CONNECTION Chapter 7 SERVO INTERFACE

Describes connection for Series 300is/310is/320is.

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR is/i/is/i series

PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1 1 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1

TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..................................................... 12 INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 16

COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE AND GROUNDING .................. 22

TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS AND GROUND TERMINALS ................................................................................................ 39

TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.8

POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION......................................................... 42

CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT ................................. 47 BATTERIES................................................................................................. 48

CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ............................................. 57

CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES ...................................... 68

CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI)........................................... 79

Linking The EMBEDDED Ethernet Interface ............................................... 81

SPINDLE CONNECTION ...................................................................... 87

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS........................................... 98

SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE...................................................... 101

ANALOG INPUT SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE .......................... 116

CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link ................................................... 130

Other Notes...........................................................................................................169 Distribution I/O Setting ........................................................................................172

CONNECTION OF OPERATOR'S PANEL I/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT)....................................................................................................... 175

FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT ..................................................... 205

CONNECTION TO ATANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR'S PANEL.......... 213

8.9.4 8.9.5 8.9.6

I/O Mapping .........................................................................................................226 Outline ..................................................................................................................227

8.9.8 8.9.9 8.9.10 8.9.11

Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel ..........................................232

STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP ....................................................... 238

INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 249

CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS .................................................. 252

TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.3

CONNECTION USING THE HIGH-SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)............ 273

CONNECTION USING Ethernet................................................................ 277

CABLE CONNECTORS ............................................................................ 347

RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES .................................................................................................... 349

Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units

Vertical soft keys

Memory card interface

Horizontal soft keys

Fan unit Battery

Unit rear panel Servo unit connector [COP10A-1] [COP10A-2] (7)

Power supply unit

Ethernet connector [CD38A] (5.5) Power supply connector [CPD16A]

MDI connector [CA55] (5.1)

Serial spindle connector [JA41] (6.1)

I/O-Link connector [JD51A] (8.2)

I/O device interface connector (RS-232-C) [JD36A/JD54] (5.3)

High-speed skip connector [JA40] (5.4)

Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units

I/O device interface connector